/usr/share/fotoxx/data/userguide-en.html

<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
<html dir="ltr">
<head>
<meta name="generator" content=
"HTML Tidy for HTML5 for Linux version 5.2.0">
<meta content="text/html; charset=utf-8" http-equiv="content-type">
<title>Fotoxx User Guide</title>
</head>
<body style="background-color: white;">
<table style="text-align: left;" height="26" width="890" border="0"
cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><big><span style=
"font-weight: bold;">Fotoxx User Guide&nbsp;
v.16.11</span></big></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top; text-align: right;">&nbsp;best
window size ==&gt;<br></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
&nbsp;<br>
<table style="text-align: left; width: 887px; height: 912px;"
border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><span style=
"font-weight: bold;">General</span><br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top; text-align: left;"><br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#fotoxx_overview">Fotoxx
Overview</a></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">description, prerequisites,
license, downloads, capabilities</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#fotoxx_usage">Fotoxx
Usage</a><br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">initialization, navigation, menus,
general procedures</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td valign="top"><a href="#function_index">Index of Menu
Functions</a><br></td>
<td valign="top">menu functions organized alphabetically for quick
lookup<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td valign="top"><a href="#recent_changes">Recent Changes</a></td>
<td valign="top">recent functional and user guide changes</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href=
"#file_view_menus"><span style="font-weight: bold;">File View
Menus</span></a><br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">menus visible in File View
mode<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href=
"#favorites_menu">Favorites Menu</a><br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">a user-configurable popup
menu<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#file_menu">File
Menu</a></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">open, save, rename, trash, delete,
print</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#file_save">File Save
Menu</a><br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">save file as new version, new file
name, or replace original<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#prev_next">Prev/Next
Button</a><br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">index to the previous or next
image file in current gallery<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#metadata_menu">Metadata
Menu</a></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">edit tags, geotags, ratings,
captions ... search images</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#select_area_menu">Area
Menu</a></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">select image areas for separate
editing, copy, paste ...</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#edit_menu">Edit
Menu</a></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">trim/crop, rotate, retouch, color,
tone mapping, add text ...</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#repair_menu">Repair
Menu</a></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">sharpen, blur, denoise, red-eye,
paint, clone ...</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#warp_menu">Warp
Menu</a></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">warp/warp, straighten, fix
perspective, flatten book page</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#effects_menu">Effects
Menu</a></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">make drawing, painting, embossing,
cartoon, add arty effects</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#combine_menu">Combine
Menu</a></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">HDR, HDF, stack, panorama, mashup
(montage)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td valign="top"><a href="#batch_menu">Batch Menu</a></td>
<td valign="top">batch tools for file conversion, metadata updates,
RAW import ...</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#tools_menu">Tools
Menu</a></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">image index, user options, batch
functions, utilities</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#help_menu">Help
Menu</a></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">quick start, user guide,
translations guide, change log ...</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href=
"#gallery_view_menus"><span style="font-weight: bold;">Gallery View
Menus</span></a><br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">menus visible in Gallery View
mode<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td valign="top"><a href="#favorites_menu">Favorites Menu</a></td>
<td valign="top">a user-configurable popup menu</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#albums_menu">Gallery
Menu</a></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">sync, export, Flickr upload,
albums, slide show</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#bookmarks">Bookmarks
Button</a><br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">jump to bookmarked gallery
position, edit bookmarks<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href=
"#gallery_view_buttons">Gallery Zoom Buttons<br></a></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">increase or decrease thumbnail
size<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href=
"#gallery_view_buttons">Gallery Sort Button</a><br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">sort gallery by file name or date,
ascending or descending<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href=
"#gallery_view_buttons">Gallery Scroll Buttons</a><br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">scroll up or down in pages, got to
gallery top or end<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#batch_menu">Batch
Menu</a><br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">batch tools for file conversion,
metadata updates, RAW import ...<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td valign="top"><a href="#tools_menu">Tools Menu</a></td>
<td valign="top">image index, user options, batch functions,
utilities</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#help_menu">Help
Menu</a></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">duplicate of the help menu listed
above<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href=
"#world_map_view"><span style="font-weight: bold;">Map View
Menus</span></a><br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">menus visible in Map View
mode<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href="#choose_map">Choose
Map</a><br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">choose among available
maps<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td valign="top"><a href="#OSM_map_source">OSM Map
Source</a><br></td>
<td valign="top"><br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href=
"#other_topics"><span style="font-weight: bold;">Other
Topics</span></a><br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href=
"#organizing_images">Organizing Images</a></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">optimize image organization for
searching and viewing</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href=
"#translations">Translations</a><br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">instructions for translating the
user interface and user manual<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><a href=
"#technical_notes">Technical Notes</a></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">technical methods and
limitations</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
&nbsp;<br>
&nbsp;<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>
<a name="fotoxx_overview" id="fotoxx_overview"></a><br>
<big><span style="font-weight: bold;">Fotoxx
Overview</span></big><br>
<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Description</span><br>
Fotoxx is a Linux application for editing photos and managing a
large image collection. The goal of Fotoxx is to meet the needs of
serious photographers while remaining fast and easy to use. Fotoxx
is standards compliant and does nothing to compromise use of other
photo apps. Fotoxx has a rich set of editing, repair, and special
effects functions. Image adjustments are displayed instandly in a
full-size image, allowing interactive optimization. Fotoxx has a
rich set of functions to organize and index a large image
collection so that finding desired images is easy and
fast.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Hardware
Requirements</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Fotoxx works best on a strong PC: 3 GHz multi-core CPU, 8 GB RAM. A
weaker PC will generally work, but may be slow for some functions
and unable to edit large images. A monitor smaller than HD
(1920x1080) may feel confining for some functions. The monitor
should have accurate color (most do not).<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Software
Requirements</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Most recent releases of popular Linux distributions will work
(Debian, Ubuntu, Fedora, Suse, Arch ...). This should be 64-bit
Linux. 32-bit may crash with large images. Fotoxx Debian packages
are built and tested using 64-bit Ubuntu. A source tarball and make
file is provided to build Fotoxx for Linux flavors that use other
package formats or have incompatible libraries.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">License and
Warranty</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Fotoxx is licensed under the <a href=
"https://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html">GNU General Public License
v3</a>. Fotoxx source code is free to use, modify, and share with
others. Fotoxx is not warranted for any purpose, but if you find a
bug, I will try to fix it.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Origin and Contact</span><br>
Fotoxx origniates from the author's web site: <a href=
"http://kornelix.net/">kornelix.net</a>.<br>
If you have questions, suggestions, or a bug to report, you may
<a href="http://kornelix.net/contact/contact.html" style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">contact me</a>.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Downloads</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
Latest source code ($ make) and installable package (.deb) are
available at <a href="http://kornelix.net/">kornelix.net</a>.
Fotoxx packages are available on many web sites and Linux distros.
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Some of these are quite
old</span> and should be avoided. It is better to use the above
link. If there is a problem, it is easier to fix if you are using
the current release.<br>
<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Updates</span><br>
Fotoxx is updated periodically with new or improved capabilities
and bug fixes.<br>
To be notified of new releases, subscribe to the blog <a href=
"http://kornelix.blogspot.com">kornelix.blogspot.com</a> (2-3 per
month).<br>
<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Optional Package
fotoxx-maps</span><br style="font-weight: bold;">
This is a set of geographic maps covering the world. They show
image locations as markers (red dots) that can be clicked to
display a corresponding image gallery. Modern cameras with GPS
receivers automatically add geotags (earth coordinates) to photos,
and these are used by Fotoxx to locate images on a map. Geotags can
also be added to images individually or with a batch utility. You
can add maps of your own at any scale, and your images will
populate the new maps automatically. A source tarball and .deb
package are available as described above. If you have a fast and
reliable internet connection, you may not need this optional
package. Interactive maps are obtained as needed from an internet
service.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">&nbsp;<br></span> <span style=
"font-weight: bold;">Translations</span><br>
Translations of the user interface are complete for French, German,
Spanish, Catalan, Italian, Portuguese.<br>
If you can help with translations, review the topic <a href=
"#translations">Translations</a>.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Fotoxx
Capabilities</span><br style=
"font-weight: bold; font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Thumbnail browser / navigator with variable size
thumbnails and list view.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Camera RAW file conversion, single or batch, with
retention of 16 bits per color.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Internal processing in 24 bits per color (float),
image file output in 8 or 16 bits.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; A comprehensive set of image edit, retouch and
repair functions: brightness,<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;&nbsp; color, contrast, tone mapping,
trim/crop, resize, rotate, sharpen, de-noise,<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; paint, clone, red eyes, add
text, warp/warp, HDR, panorama, artistic effects ...<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Select image areas or objects, edit separately from
background, copy and paste.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Rapid visual feedback using the full image or a
selected zoom-in area.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Metadata editing and reporting (tags, dates,
captions, geotags, any metadata ... )<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Batch editing: record a series of edits on one
image, execute on many images.<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Batch tools for file renaming, resizing, converting,
adding and revising metadata.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Search images using any metadata or directory / file
names or substrings.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Generate a table of image locations and date ranges,
click for gallery of images.<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Generate a table of image counts by year/month,
click for gallery of images.<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Find images by clicking on a marked map. Add your
own maps at any scale.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Create albums (arbitrary set of images). Arrange
sequence by drag and drop.<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Slide show: use various animated transitions and
slow pan/zoom in/out.<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Upload image files to the Flickr photo web
service.<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Mashup: arrange images and text in an arbitrary
layout (montage).<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Image printing and printer color calibration
utility.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Comprehensive user guide and help popups via F1
key.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
&nbsp;<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="fotoxx_usage" id=
"fotoxx_usage"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<big><span style="font-weight: bold;">Fotoxx
Usage</span></big><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Quick Start</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
This 1-page <a href=
"file:///usr/share/fotoxx/data/quickstart-en.html">document</a> is
shown when Fotoxx is started the first time.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
It is also available via the menu Help &gt; Quick Start.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">User Guide</span> (this
document)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Fotoxx is easy to use but <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">unconventional</span>. To avoid
confusion, please read the first few pages of this guide. The rest
can be used for reference as needed. The user guide is available in
the menu Help &gt; User Guide. When using Fotoxx, press the F1 key
at any time to view information for the current or last used menu
function.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Fotoxx uses the term <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">directory</span>, which is the
equivalent of <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">folder</span> in Windows land. The
terms <span style="text-decoration: underline;">file</span> and
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">image</span> and
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">image file</span> mean a
single file of type JPEG, PNG, TIFF, RAW, etc. containing a single
image (photo or illustration).<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Installation</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
To install Fotoxx, try the appropriate package first: <a style=
"font-family: sans-serif;" href=
"http://www.kornelix.net/downloads/downloads.html" target=
"_blank">packages</a>. This may work with one click.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
If not, you must install from source code. This is not difficult.
Instructions are here: <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href=
"http://www.kornelix.net/downloads/downloads.html" target=
"_blank">tarballs</a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Initialization</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
Fotoxx needs to know where all your image files are located
(directory and file names) and the imbedded metadata (dates, tags
(keywords), geotags, captions, comments, ratings). This data is
indexed for fast searching. Fotoxx also creates thumbnail image
files so that the gallery windows (thumbnail pages) will work fast.
Fotoxx does not modify or copy your image files - it only reads
them to make the index and thumbnails. These add typically 1% to
the file space required for your images.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
When Fotoxx starts the first time, you must provide information for
the initial file indexing process:<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 403px; height: 342px;" alt="" src=
"images/index-image-files.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5" align=
"left"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;"><br>
<br>
<br>
<br>
<br></span> top image directories (one or more)<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;"><br>
<br>
<br>
<br>
<br>
<br>
<br>
<br></span> thumbnail directory<br clear="all">
<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Top image
Directories</span><br>
These are the top directories containing your image files, e.g.
<span style=
"font-family: Liberation Mono;">/home/&lt;user&gt;/Pictures</span>&nbsp;
or similar. Subdirectories underneath your top directories are
automatically included, to any depth. Use the [select] button to
locate and add your top image directories, one or more. Other files
may be mixed with your image files.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Thumbnails</span><br>
This is the directory where thumbnail files will be placed. These
are generally less than 1% as large as your image files (10K bytes
compared to megabytes). You can use the supplied default or choose
another location. Indexing will run faster if this is on a separate
physical disk from the image files.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
If you have many thousands of images, the file index function may
need significant time. A strong PC (3 GHz, 7200 rpm disk) will
process about 1700 images per minute, or about 3000 for a
solid-state disk. Some PCs will be much slower. When you add new
image files to your collection, the next Fotoxx startup will index
only the new images, at the same speed. If there are no new image
files, startup should be fast (about 1 second on a strong PC
hosting 10,000 image files). For more details, see <a style=
"font-family: sans-serif;" href="#index_files">Index Image
Files</a>.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Note:</span> You can bypass
indexing if you hate this idea (probably misguided, but the
customer is always right). See the topics <a href=
"#index_files">Index Image Files</a> and <a href=
"#user_options">User Options</a>.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="window_view_modes" id=
"window_view_modes"></a>&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Window Views and
Menus</span>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 849px; height: 571px;" alt="" src=
"images/fotoxx-views.jpg" vspace="5"><br>
&nbsp;<br>
Use these buttons (window top left) to switch among the viewing
modes:<br>
<table style="text-align: left;" height="104" width="871" border=
"0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/viewF-check.png"><br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle;">Image File View (key F): the
current image file fills the entire window</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/viewG.png"><br></td>
<td>Gallery View (key G): thumbnail gallery (directory or other
image grouping)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/viewW.png"><br></td>
<td>World Map View (key W): local maps with clickable markers to
display corresponding images</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/viewM.png"><br></td>
<td>OSM Map View (key M): internet maps with clickable markers to
display corresponding images</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<br>
Each view has a row of menu buttons on the left side. These are
top-level menus. When clicked, available menu functions are shown
in a drop-down list. Hover the mouse over a menu to see popup text
with a brief description.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">File View</span> (key F)<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Zoom an image in / out with the left / right mouse
buttons or mouse wheel.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Pan and scroll a zoomed image using a mouse
left-drag.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Use the menus (left side buttons) to edit the image
and perform utility functions.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; The window title bar shows the current image file
and directory path.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; The top panel above the image shows image and edit
status information.<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Right-click on image for a popup menu of commonly
used functions.<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br style="font-weight: bold;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Gallery View</span> (key G)<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Use the menus to navigate within the gallery, change
the thumbnail size, etc.<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Click on the directory buttons at the top to go up
to higher directories.<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Lower directories appear as folder thumbnails in the
gallery. Click to go there.<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; The [TOP] button shows a drop-down list of all top
directories. Click to go there.<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Click a gallery thumbnail: show the clicked image at
full window size (File View).<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Right-click a thumbnail for a popup menu of commonly
used functions.<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">World Map View</span> (key W)<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Available only if the optional fotoxx-maps package
is installed.<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; The initial map is a very large world map (136
megapixels).<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Click anywhere to enlarge that map area to full
size.<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Left-drag to pan and scroll the enlarged map.<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Right-click to collaps the map to fit in the
window.<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; If your image files contain geotags, the map will
show corresponding markers<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; (geotags come from the camera GPS
sensor or can be entered manually).<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Click on a marker to get a gallery view of the
corresponding images.<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; You can choose among many supplied maps, and add
your own maps.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">OSM Map View</span> (key M)<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; A world map from the internet can show any place on
earth at any scale.<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Markers are present for images with geotags (as
described above).<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Click on a marker to get a gallery view of the
corresponding images.<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; No extra packages or setups are required - works out
of the box.<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Needs a fast and reliable internet connection for
good response time.<br>
<br>
The paragraphs below provide more detail about each of the viewing
modes.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="file_view" id="file_view"></a>&nbsp;<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">File View</span><br>
The current image file is shown, filling the entire window. Click
the arrow button on the left or right side to move to the previous
or next image in the gallery. The <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">current image file</span> is a key
concept in Fotoxx. This is the file that most of the menu functions
will operate on. Other buttons in this view show popup menus which
are used to modify the image or perform utility functions.<br>
<br>
<table style="text-align: left;" height="669" width="663" border=
"0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/viewF-check.png"><br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle;">current view = image file
view</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/viewG.png"><br></td>
<td>change to gallery view</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/viewW.png"><br></td>
<td>change to world map view</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/viewM.png"><br></td>
<td>change to OSM map view</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 8px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/separator.png"></td>
<td><br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/favorites.png"><br></td>
<td>favorites - custom popup menu</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/file.png"><br></td>
<td>open, rename, print, delete, trash ...</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src="../icons/save.png"></td>
<td>save, save as new version or new file</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/prev_next.png"><br></td>
<td>open previous or next image file (left or right mouse
click)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/metadata.png"><br></td>
<td>edit tags, captions, ratings, geotags ... search images</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/areas.png"><br></td>
<td>select areas for separate edit, copy, paste</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/edit.png"><br></td>
<td>trim, rotate, resize, brightness, color, contrast, add text
...</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/repair.png"><br></td>
<td>sharpen, denoise, red eyes, fix color, paint/clone<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/warp.png"><br></td>
<td>fix perspective, warp, warp image ...</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/effects.png"><br></td>
<td>special effects, arty transforms</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/combine.png"><br></td>
<td>HDR, HDF, stack, panorama, mashup (montage)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/undo_redo.png"><br></td>
<td>undo or redo edit steps (left or right mouse button)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td valign="middle" align="center"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/batch.png"></td>
<td valign="middle">batch utilities - move/convert images and RAW
files</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/tools.png"><br></td>
<td>index images, user settings, edit KB shortcuts, magnify
...</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/help.png"><br></td>
<td>help, user guide, change log, edit translations ...<br></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Mouse Actions for Image File
View</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
To zoom the image in the main window, left-click a position on the
image. The image will grow with each click and the clicked position
will move to the center. A right-click will restore the image to
fit within the window. To pan or scroll a zoomed image, left-drag
the mouse across the image. The image can move with the mouse or in
the opposite direction (like scroll bars), depending on a user
setting (menu Tools &gt; User Setings). The movement may be 1:1
with the mouse, or may be magnified for faster movement. The mouse
wheel may also be used to zoom the image in or out. The middle
mouse button (wheel) will make a zoomed image re-center at the
mouse position.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="gallery_view" id="gallery_view"></a> &nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Gallery View</span><br>
All image files in the current directory are shown as thumbnails.
You can scroll through the thumbnails and navigate to other
directories. The arrow buttons allow scrolling forward or back. You
can also scroll with the mouse wheel or scroll bar. Use the zoom
buttons to change the thumbnail size. Clicking on a thumbnail will
change to file view and display the image full size. This image is
now the "current image". Pressing the gallery button in file view
will show the gallery view, with the current image scrolled to the
top row. The directory path is shown at the top of the gallery
window, with one button per directory level. Click one of the
buttons to go to that directory. Its subdirectories will be shown
as folder thumbnails. Click one of them to go to that directory.
Click the [Top] button to choose another top image directory (if
more than one), the root directory ( / ) your home directory
(/home/&lt;user&gt;), a gallery of the most recently viewed images,
or a gallery of the newest images added to your collection.<br>
<br>
<table style="text-align: left;" height="646" width="630" border=
"0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/viewF.png"><br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle;">change to image file view</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/viewG-check.png"><br></td>
<td>current view = gallery view</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/viewW.png"><br></td>
<td>change to world map view</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/viewM.png"><br></td>
<td>change to OSM map view</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 8px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/separator.png"></td>
<td><br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/favorites.png"><br></td>
<td>favorites - custom popup menu</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;" valign="middle" align="center">
<img style="width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"images/gmenu.png" height="60" width="64"></td>
<td>sync gallery, export, Flickr upload, albums, slide
show<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/goto.png"><br></td>
<td>edit bookmarks, go to a bookmark</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/zoom+.png"><br></td>
<td>larger thumbnails</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/zoom-.png"><br></td>
<td>smaller thumbnails</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/sort.png"><br></td>
<td>sort gallery images by file name or date</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/top.png"><br></td>
<td>go up to gallery top</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/bottom.png"><br></td>
<td>go down to gallery end</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src="../icons/up.png"><br></td>
<td>go up one page</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/down.png"><br></td>
<td>go down one page</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/scroll.png"><br></td>
<td>slow motion gallery scroll</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/batch.png"><br></td>
<td>batch utilities - move/convert images and RAW files</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td valign="middle" align="center"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/tools.png"></td>
<td valign="middle">index images, user settings, edit KB shortcuts,
magnify ...</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/help.png"><br></td>
<td>help, user guide, change log, edit translations ...</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<br>
There are several types of galleries:<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Directory: all the image files in a single directory
(folder)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Search results: images found by a search function,
in various directories<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Images in an Album: these may be located in various
directories<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Recent Files: the most recently viewed or edited
images<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Newest Files: the images most recently added or
modified in the image collection<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>
The gallery window title bar will show the directory name (path),
the album name, or <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Search
Results</span> or <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Recent
Files</span> or <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Newest
Files</span>. If the gallery corresponds to a directory, buttons
for navigating to parent directories are shown in the top panel.
The other gallery types have only the buttons for Album (select an
album) and TOP (go to another directory).<br>
&nbsp;<br>
If the current gallery is not a directory gallery (e.g. Recent
Files), you can navigate to a directory by using the [TOP] button
in the navigation bar above the thumbnails.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
The [Sort] button is used to sort the thumbnails by file name, file
modification date, or photo date (from EXIF data). The displayed
date is photo date unless the sort is by file date. Ascending or
descending order can be chosen. Albums retain the order they were
made with. They cannot be sorted.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="thumbnail_popups" id="thumbnail_popups"></a><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Thumbnail Popups</span><br>
A gallery thumbnail has a <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">right-click menu</span> with some
commonly used functions. One of these is <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Popup Image</span>, which creates a
popup window with a larger image that can be rapidly zoomed to any
size with the mouse wheel. Many popup windows can be open at once.
This is useful for comparing multiple photos of the same
subject.<br>
<br>
Popup Image Manipulation:<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Click thumbnail with middle mouse button: popup
image appears<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Click thumbnail with shift + left mouse button:
popup image appears<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Mouse scroll wheel: zoom the image bigger or
smaller<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Key F11: make popup image full screen, or return to
prior size<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Left mouse button: kill the popup image<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Escape key: kill the popup image<br>
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a name="world_map_view" id="world_map_view"></a>&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">World Map View</span><br>
Initially a world map is displayed. A left click on any area will
expand that area to a much larger size, and a right click will
return to the whole map view. The mouse wheel also works. Markers
are shown where there are images with a corresponding geotag
location (from a camera GPS receiver or entered manually into the
image EXIF data). The markers can be clicked to show a gallery view
of the corresponding images.<br>
<br>
<table style="text-align: left;" height="182" width="685" border=
"0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/viewF.png"><br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle;">change to image file view</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/viewG.png"><br></td>
<td>change to gallery view</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/viewW-check.png"><br></td>
<td>current view = world map</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/viewM.png"><br></td>
<td>change to OSM map view</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 8px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/separator.png"></td>
<td><br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/choosemap.png"><br></td>
<td>choose from available maps (Europe, USA, Germany ...)</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<br>
The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Choose Map</span>
menu offers a selection of large-scale continental and country
maps, and you can also install other maps (countries, cities,
parks, etc.). These all work the same way. Markers are shown where
there are images with a corresponding geotag location. The markers
can be clicked to show a gallery view of the corresponding
images.<br>
<img style="width: 800px; height: 249px;" alt="" src=
"images/map-click.jpg"><br>
&nbsp;<br>
The initial maps are provided in a separate package: fotoxx-maps.
Fotoxx-maps is large - almost 100 MB of maps are provided. You can
also add your own maps, explained in the topic <a href=
"#images_by_map">Images by Map Location</a>.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="OSM_map_view" id="OSM_map_view"></a><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">OSM Map View<br></span> This view
is similar to the above world map view. The functionality is
generally superior, but it depends on having a fast and reliable
internet connection. An internet map service is used. Initially a
world map is displayed. Use the mouse wheel (or double-click) to
zoom-in to any location. Shift the map center using mouse drag. The
entire world is represented and can be viewed at any scale. Markers
are shown where there are images with a corresponding geotag
location. The markers can be clicked to show a gallery view of the
corresponding images. Geotags in image files (EXIF metadata) come
from a camera GPS receiver or can be entered manually into the
image EXIF data.<br>
<br>
<table style="text-align: left;" height="217" width="473" border=
"0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/viewF.png"><br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle;">change to image file view</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/viewG.png"><br></td>
<td>change to gallery view</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/viewW.png"><br></td>
<td>change to world map view</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/viewM-check.png"><br></td>
<td>current view = OSM map</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td valign="middle" align="center"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 8px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/separator.png"></td>
<td valign="top"><br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td valign="middle" align="center"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"../icons/choosemap.png"></td>
<td valign="middle">choose internet map source<br></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<br>
If your internet connection is slow or unreliable, it may be best
to use the previous World Map method. This is also the only way to
make a custom map.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="drag-drop"></a><br>
<b>File Drag and Drop</b><br>
Fotoxx accepts drag-drop of image files to F-view or G-view mode.
In F-view, the file is opened. In G-view, the result depends on the
type of gallery. If the gallery is a directory, the file is added
to the directory and the gallery will show the new file in its
sorted position, by file name. If the gallery is an album, the file
is added to the album in the position where it is dropped. This
works also if a text string that is a valid file name is
dropped.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="general_editing" id=
"general_editing"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">General Image Editing
Procedures</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
The image in file view mode (the current image) can be modified
with the edit functions in the menus Edit, Repair, Warp, Effects,
Combine. These functions modify the current image in memory and as
seen in the window. You can use these functions in any order, and
the changes are accumulated. When finished editing, use [Save] to
save the modified image back to the same file, save to a new file
version (e.g. filename.v01.jpg), or input a new file name and / or
directory. Image edit dialogs have sliders, spin buttons, or
editable curves that immediately update the image. The reaction
time depends on the size of the image, the complexity of the
function and the speed of your PC. This is typically less than
second for most edit functions on a strong PC.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br>
<img style="width: 40px; height: 23px;" alt="" src=
"images/undo_redo.png" hspace="5" align="left"> Click the
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">undo/redo button</span>
on the left or right side to undo or redo the currently active edit
function. After an image has had one or more edits applied and is
still the current image, the undo/redo button can be used to go
back to prior edit steps or forward to the last edit step. The
middle mouse button raises a popup list of all edits done to the
current image, and you can select any step to go back to. The image
can then be re-edited from this step.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; <span style="font-weight: bold;"><br>
Edit Workflow</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
You can minimize the time needed to process many images if you
understand the following:<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<ul style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<li>Choosing a new edit function will automatically complete a
prior active edit.<br>
The new edit starts with the end result of the prior edit, and an
undo / redo position is created.<br></li>
<li>Opening a new image file during an edit function will
automatically cancel the edit.<br>
The edit function is restarted with the new image.</li>
<li>The [Save] button can be used during an active edit to save the
current image status.<br>
The edit function restarts automatically, and an undo / redo
position is created.<br></li>
<li>Some frequently used functions have a [Prev] button which
recalls previous settings,<br>
making it easier to process multiple photos needing the same or
similar adjustments.<br></li>
</ul>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Example Workflow</span>
for the initial rotate and trim (crop) of a new batch of
photos.<br>
You can process one photo every few seconds (+ think
time).<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; 1.&nbsp; Copy files from the camera memory card to a
directory.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; 2.&nbsp; Open the first file.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; 3.&nbsp; Menu: Edit &gt; <a href=
"#trim_rotate">Trim/Rotate</a>.<br>
Repeat steps 4-7 for each image. The Trim/Rotate dialog remains
open.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; 4.&nbsp; Level the image if needed (drag the right
edge).<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; 5.&nbsp; Trim the image by dragging the trim borders to
suit.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; 6.&nbsp; Press [Save] and choose "new version".<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; 7.&nbsp; Press [Next] to edit the next file. Press [Next]
again to skip over.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Simple Workflow</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
Most of the time you can just edit the JPEG file that comes out of
the camera. Use the following more complex procedure only if you
see "color bands" or "posterization" after editing the image, an
indication that JPEG 8-bit color is limiting the image quality.<br>
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Complex Workflow</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
To edit with deep color (more than 8 bits), you can start with RAW
files from your camera. There are three options for processing RAW
files:<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<ul style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<li>Open a RAW file directly with Fotoxx: use the [Open] button or
click the gallery thumbnail. The RAW file may now be edited
normally. Save the edited image file as type TIFF or PNG with 8- or
16-bit color, or JPEG with 8-bit color. You cannot save the edited
image as a RAW file type. Opening a RAW file may need several
seconds, especially on a weak PC. Saving an edited image as TIFF or
PNG is slower than JPEG.<br></li>
<li>Open the RAW file with the File &gt; Open RAW menu, or
right-click the gallery thumbnail and use the open RAW popup menu.
This opens a specialized RAW editor (currently Raw Therapee). Save
the file in the RAW editor as a TIFF-16 file, which will pass back
to Fotoxx for further editing if wanted.<br></li>
<li>Use one of the Tools &gt; Batch RAW menus. You can select many
RAW files and convert all of them to type TIFF or PNG with 8- or
16-bit color, or JPEG with 8-bit color. You may then select and
edit these files with Fotoxx.</li>
</ul>
RAW files may have more color depth than 8 bits, especially if the
camera is new and very expensive. Conversion into a PNG or TIFF
file with 16-bit color will preserve the additional color depth
available in the RAW file. The higher color depth reduces the risk
of visible color bands when retouch functions are used that can
radically shift the brightness distribution. When finished editing,
convert the final file to JPEG (quality level 70 or greater) to
reduce the file size to 10% or less. Note that editing in deep
color is more important than having deep color in the final image.
It is very hard to see any difference between a 16-bit TIFF / PNG
file and a high quality JPEG made from that same file. To preserve
the possibility of re-editing the image later, keep the RAW file,
which is smaller than the TIFF or PNG file.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Edit Dialog Mouse
Ownership</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Some dialogs use the mouse to reference or alter the image in the
main window. There may be more than one such dialog active at the
same time. The mouse is also used to zoom and scroll the image, and
you may need to do this while using a dialog. Therefore it is
important to understand who owns the mouse (which dialog, or main
window) and how to change the ownership:
<ul style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<li>The mouse is owned by the dialog that was last clicked or used.
Mouse clicks and drags on the image are inputs to this dialog and
DO NOT zoom or scroll the image.</li>
<li>If you hold the CTRL key down while clicking or dragging the
mouse, the image will zoom or pan / scroll, and active dialogs are
not affected.</li>
<li>The mouse wheel can always be used to zoom-in on any part of
the image.<br></li>
</ul>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Edit Dialog buttons</span> mostly
work as follows:<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; [Proceed] - proceed with lengthy task based on
dialog inputs.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; [Apply] - apply settings from dialog to image,
leave dialog active.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; [Done] - same as [Apply], but the dialog is
closed.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; [Cancel] - discard image changes and close the
dialog.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="curve_editing" id=
"curve_editing"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Curve Editing</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 262px; height: 415px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/retouch-combo.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5" align=
"left"><br>
Some image edit functions use editable curves. You can manipulate
the curves to change some property of the image depending on some
other property. The example here shows a brightness curve, whereby
you can change brightness depending on brightness (e.g. brighten
dark image areas without changing bright areas). Generally, the
X-axis of the curve represents the input property (brightness in
this example) and the Y-axis the output property (also brightness).
The curves can be moved (pulled) with the mouse. "Up" increases the
effect and "down" decreases the effect. An anchor point (black dot)
is added to the curve wherever it is pulled, and this point remains
fixed for subsequent pulls: the curve will continue to go through
this point as other parts of the curve are pulled. Anchor points
can also be dragged. Delete an anchor point by right-clicking
it.&nbsp;<br clear="all">
&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="batch_editing" id=
"batch_editing"></a>&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Batch Editing</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
There are several batch functions in the Tools menu to speed some
common tasks.<br>
You can select any number of image files (<a href=
"#gallery_selection">link</a>) and execute the batch function for
all of them.<br>
<br>
Batch functions can be used for the following tasks:<br>
<ul>
<li>Rename files, using any of: old name, new name, sequence
number, photo date.</li>
<li>Convert file types (e.g. .png to .jpeg)</li>
<li>Find and upright photos made with the camera turned 90
degrees<br></li>
<li>Resize files (e.g. reduce for web upload or e-mail)</li>
<li>Copy or move files to another location</li>
<li>Convert RAW files to tiff, png, or jpeg</li>
<li>Add / change / remove tags or geotags</li>
<li>Delete files or move them to Trash</li>
<li><a href="#script_files">Script Files</a>: perform multiple
edits on one image, save as a script file<br>
which can then be applied to any number of images in batch
mode.</li>
<li>Burn selected image files to a DVD or BlueRay disc.</li>
<li>Find duplicated image files.</li>
</ul>
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="gallery_selection" id=
"gallery_selection"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Selecting Image Files from an
Image Gallery Window</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
This procedure is used for all functions that operate on multiple
image files (batch add or delete tags, batch convert images, batch
RAW convert, manage albums, others). It is explained once here, and
this topic is linked from each of the functions using this
procedure.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
<img style="width: 804px; height: 564px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/gallery-select.jpg" hspace="5" vspace=
"5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
The dialog box is used to select image files. Behind it is a
gallery window for the current directory, album, or search results.
To select an image, click its thumbnail and the image file will be
added to the list in the dialog. Other options are shown below. You
can navigate the gallery window to other directories by clicking on
the directory names at the top or clicking on thumbnails
represending subdirectories. You can choose images from any gallery
in any order. The list of image files can also be manipulated to
change the sequence or remove images added by mistake. Click on a
file in the list to show its thumbnail in the dialog and also set
the current list position. The next image file added will be
inserted at this position. If the [delete] button is pressed, the
current list position will be deleted, and if the [insert] button
is pressed, the last deleted image file will be inserted at the
current position. The last 100 images deleted are saved and can be
re-inserted anywhere: each use of the [insert] button removes one
image from the saved list and inserts it at the current position.
To move images to a new position in the list: click the image file
(its thumbnail will be shown), click [delete]. Repeat to delete
more images. Click an image file to set the insert position, then
click [insert]. The first deleted image will be inserted before the
selected image. Repeat to insert more images from the deleted list.
The file list in the dialog can also be edited directly: you can
use cut and paste to get the sequence you wish, but be careful to
always cut and paste entire lines (complete file names). The
[add_all] button will add all the image files in the current image
gallery. You can select individual images from the gallery, or use
[add all] and then delete unwanted images. A single image may also
be added multiple times to the list. Image search functions output
to a gallery window, and these can be used for selecting images
just like a gallery from a physical directory.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Thumbnail click
rules:</span><br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; left click: add the image at the current list
position.<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; right click: remove the image from the list, if
present.<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Shift + left click: add all images from the last
image added up to the clicked image.<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; (works in either direction,
first to last or last to first)<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;"><a name="menu_shortcuts" id=
"menu_shortcuts"></a><br>
Menu Shortcuts</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
The Fotoxx menus are large. You may need time to get used to them
and remember where the functions are located. There are three
shortcut methods available for frequently used functions:<br>
<ul style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<li>Right-click the main window or gallery window thumbnail.<br>
A popup menu appears with some commonly used menu
functions.<br></li>
<li>Keyboard shortcuts - these are documented in a table below.<br>
You can also add your own shortcuts for menu functions you
choose.<br></li>
<li>Favorites menu - a graphic popup menu with your custom
contents. You can add text and / or icons that link to any menu
functions you choose. You can arrange these as you wish in a layout
window. You can leave this window open and access any of these
functions with a single mouse click.</li>
</ul>
&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Managing a Large Image
Collection</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
You can use Fotoxx to manage a huge image collection and still be
able to quickly find the images you want. Some effort to organize
the images is required. Search methods include directory and file
names (or partial names), image dates, image ratings, tags
(keywords) (labels for persons, places, objects, events ...),
captions and comments, and geotags (location names and latitude /
longitude). This is done in a standards-compliant manner so that
data can be shared with other image management applications.
Options for how to organize a large image collection can be found
in the topic <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href=
"#organizing_images">Organizing Images</a>.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;"><a name="popup_menus" id=
"popup_menus"></a><br>
Right-Click Popup Menus</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
These menus appear when the image view window or a gallery
thumbnail is right-clicked with the mouse. These are the most
frequently used functions and are available as popup menus for
convenience. Most of these are also contained in one of the
left-side main menus for image view and gallery view, as shown
above.<br>
<small><small><small>&nbsp;</small></small></small><br>
<table style="text-align: left; font-family: sans-serif;" height=
"691" width="844" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><span style=
"font-weight: bold;">&nbsp;File View popup
menu</span><br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>right click on current
image in File View mode to get the following menu</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;View
Metadata<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Show short form metadata
report<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Edit
Metadata<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Edit key metadata items:
photo date/time, rating, tags, captions, comments,
geotags<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Edit Any
Metadata<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Edit any metadata
item<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;Rename<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Change the file
name<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Copy/Move to
Location<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Copy or move the image file
to another location<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td valign="top"><small>&nbsp;Copy to Desktop<br></small></td>
<td valign="top"><small>Copy the image file to the desktop (monitor
background)<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Copy to Image
Cache<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Add the image file to the
file cache for later pasting into an album<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Copy to
Clipboard<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Copy the image file to the
clipboard (for other apps to paste)<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;Upright<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Upright the image that is
turned 90 degrees<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;Trim/Rotate<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Trim (crop) the image,
level the image or turn 90 degrees<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;Resize<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Resize (rescale) the image
width and height<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Voodoo 1 and Voodoo
2<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Limited automatic image
enhancement, two varieties<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Retouch
Combo<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Adjust brightness, color,
contrast, saturation, black point, white balance<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Edit
Brightness<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Adjust the brightness
distribution (flatten, broaden, change black and white
points)<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Zonal
Flatten<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Enhance contrast and
brighten shadows, especially image areas with low
contrast<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Tone
Mapping<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Enhance contrast and
apparent brightness range by increasing brightness
gradients<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Select
Area<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Select an image object or
area for separate editing<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Show on OSM
Map<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Go to OSM map view, zoom-in
to image location (if earth coordinates present)<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Delete/Trash
...<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Delete the image file or
move it to the wastebasket<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><span style=
"font-weight: bold;">&nbsp;Gallery View popup
menu</span><br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>right click on thumbnail
image to get the following menu<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Popup
Image<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Show image in a larger
window - resizable, movable, persistent until
canceled</small><small>.<br>
Zoom in/out using the mouse wheel. When zoomed small it
disappears.<br>
Shift + left mouse click on a thumbnail: shortcut for Popup
Image.</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;View
Metadata<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Show short form metadata
report</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Edit
Metadata</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Edit key metadata items:
photo date/time, rating, tags, captions, comments,
geotags</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Edit Any
Metadata</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Edit any metadata
item</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;Rename<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Change the file
name</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Copy/Move to
Location</small> <small><br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Copy or move the image file
to another location</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td valign="top"><small>&nbsp;Copy to Desktop<br></small></td>
<td valign="top"><small>Copy the image file to the desktop (monitor
background)</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Copy to Image
Cache<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Add the image file to the
file cache for later pasting into an album</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Copy to
Clipboard<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Copy the image file to the
clipboard (for other apps to paste)</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Upright</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Upright the image that is
turned 90 degrees</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Show on OSM
Map</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Go to OSM map view, zoom-in
to image location (if earth coordinates present)</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;Delete/Trash</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Delete the image file or
move it to the wastebasket</small></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
&nbsp; &nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;"><a name="keyboard_shortcuts" id=
"keyboard_shortcuts"></a><br>
Keyboard Shortcuts</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Keyboard shortcuts are available for some functions. The notation
"Alt+G" means press and hold the Alt key, then press the G key.
Many of these can be changed, and new shortcuts can be added (see
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href=
"#KB_shortcuts">KB-</a><a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href=
"#KB_shortcuts">shortcuts</a> function).<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<small><small><small>&nbsp;&nbsp;</small></small></small><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<table style="text-align: left; font-family: sans-serif;" height=
"662" width="773" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><span style=
"font-weight: bold;">General</span><br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;F / G / W / M&nbsp;
keys</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Change view mode: image
File, Gallery, World map, OSM map<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;F1 function
key</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Display user guide for
current or prior function</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;F10 function
key</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Toggle main window to
full-screen and back. Menu and top panel remain.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;F11 function
key<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Same as F10, but without
menu and top panel. Useful for image viewing.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-weight: bold;"><small>Image
File View<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;left / right arrow
keys</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Previous / next image
(<a href="#prev_next">link</a>)<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;+ or =&nbsp; /&nbsp;
- keys</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Zoom image bigger / smaller
(zoom amount adjustable in User Options)<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Z</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Toggle: zoom image to 100%
/ fit image in window</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;S<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Sync Gallery: set gallery
from current image file<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;X</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Magnify Image</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;P</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Open Previous File (or
toggle between last two files)<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;U</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Undo current edit, or undo
one edit step in the current image</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Shift+U</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Redo current edit, or redo
one edit step in the current image</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;N</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Rename Image
File</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;K</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>View and edit keyboard
shortcuts<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Alt+G</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Grid Lines on / off
(toggle)<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;T</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Trim/Rotate
Image</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;R</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Retouch Combo</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Escape
key</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Exit a dialog, exit Slide
Show mode<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Space
Bar</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Pause / resume a running
slide show<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-weight: bold;"><small>Gallery
View<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Home / End
keys</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>move to first / last page
of image gallery</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Page Up / Down
keys</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>move to previous / next
page of image gallery</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;up / down arrow
keys</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>move up / down by one row
of image gallery</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;left / right arrow
keys</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>move to previous / next
page of image gallery</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;+ or =&nbsp; /&nbsp;
-&nbsp; keys</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>bigger / smaller thumbnail
size</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;H<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>toggle the display of
hidden files and directories<br></small></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Mouse Functions</span>
<table style="text-align: left; font-family: sans-serif;" height=
"530" width="819" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><span style=
"font-weight: bold;">&nbsp;Image File View</span><br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: middle;"><small>&nbsp;left
click</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle;"><small>Zoom-in: magnify image,
center at click position</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: middle;"><small>&nbsp;right
click</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: middle;"><small>If image is zoomed:
restore to window size. If not, popup menu with common
functions.</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;mouse
wheel</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Zoom image in or out
depending on wheel direction</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><small>&nbsp;left drag on image</small></td>
<td><small>Pan / scroll zoomed image, same direction or magnified
opposite direction (like scroll bars)</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;mouse + Ctrl
key<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Mouse acts on main window
instead of an active dialog, e.g. Select Area.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;<span style=
"font-weight: bold;">Gallery View</span><br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;left click
thumbnail<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Change to F-view, show
full-size image<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;right click
thumbnail<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Show popup menu with common
functions<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;middle click
thumbnail<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Pop up a larger image which
can be zoomed in or out using the mouse wheel<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;scroll mouse
wheel<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Scroll the gallery page up
or down<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><span style=
"font-weight: bold;">&nbsp;World Map View</span><br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;left
click<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>If map zoomed small to fit
window, zoom map large at clicked location<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;right
click<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Zoom map small to fit
window<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;left
drag<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>If map is zoomed large,
drag map with the mouse<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;left click on
marker<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Change to Gallery View,
show all images with geotags at corresponding
location<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;mouse
wheel<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Can be used for zooming as
described above<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;<span style=
"font-weight: bold;">OSM Map View</span><br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;mouse
wheel<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Zoom the map in (2x) or out
(0.5x)<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;left click on
marker<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Change to Gallery View,
show all images with geotags at corresponding location</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;left
drag<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Drag map with the
mouse<br></small></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="command_line" id="command_line"></a><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Command Line Parameters</span>
(long and short forms)
<table style="text-align: left; font-family: sans-serif;" height=
"266" width="819" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;file or directory
path<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>initial image file or
directory (gallery) to open</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;-album "album
name"<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;-a<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>initial album (gallery) to
open<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;-ver</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;-v<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>output release version and
exit</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;-recent<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;-r<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>show a gallery of recently
seen image files, most recent at the top</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;-new&nbsp;<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;-n<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>show a gallery of the
newest image files (from Index Image Files)<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;-prev&nbsp;</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;-p<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>show the last file viewed
in the previous session</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;-blank<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;-b<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>show a blank
window</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;-lang
lc_RC<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;-l<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>language code (+ opt.
region code) to use for GUI (de, de_AT)</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;-menu "func
name"</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;-m<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>startup menu function -
Fotoxx will start with this function active.</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;-index
N<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>disable image indexing for
faster startup (see below)<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;-home
/.../fotoxx_home<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>use an alternate location
for user data (instead of
/home/&lt;user&gt;/.fotoxx)<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;-cycledesktop
...<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>use fotoxx to rotate
desktop background image (see <a href="#cycle_desktop">cycle
desktop</a>)<br></small></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
&nbsp; &nbsp;<br>
<u>-index N&nbsp; parameter</u><br>
This command line parameter can be used at Fotoxx startup to partly
or completely disable image indexing to obtain a faster startup
time. N is 0 or 1 or 2, as explained in the topic <a href=
"#user_options">User Options</a>. <span style=
"font-weight: bold;"><br>
Note:</span> the first Fotoxx startup after a reboot may be slow if
your image collection is very large. Subsequent startups will be
much faster since the image index file is now cached in memory. If
you wish to bypass indexing entirely, use&nbsp; -index 0. Search
and map functions will be disabled until you allow the indexing
process to complete normally.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<u>-home&nbsp; parameter</u><br>
Normally all user data (tag names, bookmarks, albums, favorites
...) is kept in <span style=
"font-family: Liberation Mono;">/home/&lt;user&gt;/.fotoxx</span>.
The image index file is also here. The command: <span style=
"font-family: Liberation Mono;">$ fotoxx -home
/some/directory</span>...&nbsp; will expect all this data to be in
the designated directory. This allows you to have multiple image
collections that are managed separately. If Fotoxx is started for
the first time with a -home parameter, the initial image file
indexing process will begin.<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Top Panel Status
Information</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
The top panel has information about the current image file and its
status:<br>
<span style="font-family: monospace; font-weight: bold;">CPU
123%&nbsp; 2345x1234x8&nbsp; 3.45MB&nbsp; 56%&nbsp; edits: 3&nbsp;
blocked&nbsp; area active&nbsp; dialog open&nbsp; busy</span>
<small><span style=
"font-family: sans-serif; font-weight: bold;">[::::::: &nbsp;&nbsp;
]</span></small>
<table style="text-align: left; font-family: sans-serif;" height=
"200" width="819" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;CPU 123%</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>current Fotoxx CPU load for
all threads and processor cores</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;2345x1234x8<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>image width x height x
depth (bits per color)</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;3.45M</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>image file size (updated
when a modified image is saved)</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;56%</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>zoom status, image %
size</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;edits: 3</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>3 edits have been made and
can be reversed with the [undo] button</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;blocked<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>some menu functions are
blocked until the current function is completed<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;area
active&nbsp;&nbsp;</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>a select area is present
and enabled - edits are confined within the area</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;dialog
open</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>a dialog is waiting for
user input (if not visible, look behind other
windows)<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;busy [::::
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; ]<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>some long running functions
show this simple progress bar<br></small></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
&nbsp;<br>
&nbsp;<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>
<big><span style="font-weight: bold;"><a name="file_view_menus" id=
"file_view_menus"></a></span></big>&nbsp;<br>
<big><span style="font-weight: bold;"><img style=
"width: 44px; height: 44px;" alt="" src="images/viewF.png"><br>
File View Menus</span></big><br>
<big><small>The following are the menus and buttons seen in the
File View mode.<br>
&nbsp;<br></small></big> <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name=
"favorites_menu" id="favorites_menu"></a>&nbsp;<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 39px; height: 39px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/favorites.png" vspace="5"><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Favorites</span> (File View &gt;
Favorites)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 233px; height: 149px;" alt="" src=
"images/favorites1.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5" align=
"left"><img style="width: 407px; height: 179px;" alt="" src=
"images/favorites2.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
This is a graphic popup menu which you can populate with your
frequently used functions and arrange them on the window using the
mouse. An initial popup window (left image) is supplied. Right
click an empty space on the window to define a new menu entry.
Right click an existing entry to modify it. Use the resulting
dialog (right image) to define or change the menu entry. The
example above has mostly text menu entries, but the example 'warp'
entry was given an icon.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<table style="text-align: left; font-family: sans-serif;" height=
"112" width="689" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;menu
text</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>text for the popup menu -
optional if a menu icon is used</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;menu
func</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>the Fotoxx function to use
- the exact menu name</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;menu
icon</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>menu icon -
/directory.../filename.png - optional if a menu text is
used</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;icon
size</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>if an icon is used, its
size can be 24x24 to 64x64 pixels</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;close
window</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>checkbox: option to close
the popup window when this menu is selected</small></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Left drag a menu entry to move it somewhere else on the popup
window. The popup window can be resized to fit the contained menu
entries. Left click a menu entry to select the menu. If "close
window" was checked, the popup window will close. All menu settings
and icon files are saved in a configuration file whenever the popup
window is closed. The configuration file and saved icons are
located in the directory:<br>
<span style="font-family: Liberation Mono;">&nbsp;&nbsp;
/home/&lt;user&gt;/.fotoxx/favorites.</span><br>
You can use either the English menu names or their translations for
your locale. The menu names must exactly match the Fotoxx menus,
but case is not significant. The menu text may include "\n" to
represent a newline character.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Icon library</span>:
Icons for many image edit functions can be found here:<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; <span style=
"font-family: Liberation Mono;">/usr/share/fotoxx/icons/edit-funcs</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

&nbsp;<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="file_menu" id=
"file_menu"></a>&nbsp;<br>
<img style="width: 40px; height: 40px;" alt="" src=
"images/file.png" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<big><span style="font-weight: bold;">File Menu</span> <small>(File
View &gt; File)</small></big><small><br></small> &nbsp;<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="new_window" id=
"new_window"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">New Window</span> (File View &gt;
File &gt; New Window)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Start a new instance of Fotoxx in a new window, slightly offset for
visibility. This is useful to compare images or to work with more
than one image at a time. Both windows can be used to edit images.
The new window will initially have an unmodified version of the
current image file. If the same image file is edited in both
windows, the final result is the file saved last.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="sync_gallery"></a><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Sync Gallery</span> (Gallery View
&gt; Menu &gt; Sync Gallery)<br>
Replace the current gallery (recent files, search results ...) with
the directory of the current image file: the image file shown in
the File View window.<br>
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="recent_images" id=
"recent_images"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Recently Seen Images</span> (File
View &gt; File &gt; Recently Seen Images)<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
The 100 most recently seen image files (viewed or edited) are shown
in a gallery, from which you can select files to view or
edit.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="newest_images" id=
"newest_images"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Newest Images</span> (File View
&gt; File &gt; Newest Images)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
The 1000 most recently added or modified image files are shown in a
gallery, from which you can select files to view or edit. You are
given a choice of using the EXIF photo date or the file
modification date to determine the newest images. If the EXIF date
is chosen, image files having no EXIF date are ignored.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="open_image_file" id=
"open_image_file"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Open Image File</span> (File View
&gt; File &gt; Open Image File)<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
This function starts a standard file open dialog, allowing you to
select an image file or navigate to another directory and select an
image file. The selected file is opened in the Fotoxx main window
where you can view or edit the image file using the menus and
buttons. The main window title bar always shows the file name and
directory of the current image file.<br>
<br>
Camera RAW files can also be opened. This may need a few seconds
depending on file size and processor speed.&nbsp; You can proceed
to edit the RAW file like any other image file. RAW files are also
included in thumbnail galleries, as long as a .jpeg thumbnail image
can be extracted from the RAW file (normally true). When saving a
RAW file, you must specify a type TIFF or PNG (8- or 16-bit color),
or JPEG (8-bit). The RAW file type (file extension) must be
included in the list of known RAW file types in Tools &gt;
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#user_options">User
Options</a>.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="open_previous_file" id=
"open_previous_file"></a>&nbsp;<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Open Previous File</span> (File
View &gt; File &gt; Open Previous File) (Key P)<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
Go back to the previously opened image file, also if this is in a
different directory. This differs from the button [Prev/Next] which
goes to the previous or next image file in the current gallery
(directory, search results, album). This function retains the
current image zoom size and position, which is ideal for rapidly
comparing two edited versions of the same image. Zoom-in on the
area to compare, and use this function to switch back and forth
between the two images.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="open_raw_file" id=
"open_raw_file"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Open RAW File (rawtherapee)</span>
(File View &gt; File &gt; Open RAW (Raw Therapee))<br style=
"font-weight: bold;">
Select and open a RAW camera file using RawTherapee. You can make
adjustments to the RAW file such as color temperature, white
balance, brightness, color, noise, etc. using Raw Therapee. When
the file is saved, a TIFF file is created with 16-bit color depth.
This file is now opened in Fotoxx and can be further edited, saved
as JPEG, etc. The RAW file type (file extension) must be included
in the list of known RAW file types in Tools &gt; <a style=
"font-family: sans-serif;" href="#user_options">User
Options</a>.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="new_blank_image" id="new_blank_image"></a>&nbsp;<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">New Blank Image</span> (File View
&gt; File &gt; New Blank Image)<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
Create a blank image with specified pixel dimensions and color.
This can be used as a background for cutouts taken from other
images (via <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href=
"#select_area">Select Area</a>) and annotation text (via <a style=
"font-family: sans-serif;" href="#add_text">Add Text</a>). Input a
file name, choose a background color, and set the desired pixel
dimensions. See also the <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href=
"#mashup">Mashup</a> function.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="rename_file" id=
"rename_file"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Rename Image File</span> (File
View &gt; File &gt; Rename Image File) (key N)&nbsp;<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 351px; height: 165px;" alt="" src=
"images/rename.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br clear="all">
This function can automate the process of renaming a series of
image files using a root name (e.g. an event or place name) and a
sequence number. Open the first image file in the series, input a
new name, and press the [apply] button. Use the [next] button to
move to the next file if wanted. You can use the same name again by
pressing the [previous name] button and then add a suffix or
sequence number. Press the [add 1] button to increment the sequence
number. A file version number (.vNN) in the previous file name is
not copied, and if the file being renamed has a version number, it
will be retained.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="copy_move" id="copy_move"></a><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Copy/Move Image File</span> (File
View &gt; File &gt; Copy/Move to Location)<br>
<img style="width: 467px; height: 177px;" alt="" src=
"images/copy-move.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>
The current file (file view), or the file of a clicked gallery
thumbnail (gallery view), is copied to the given location. This
location can be entered directly or chosen by a file open dialog if
the [browse] button is used. Select the <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">copy</span> option to copy the file
and leave the source file in place, creating a duplicate. Select
the <span style="text-decoration: underline;">move</span> option to
move the file from the original location to the new location.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="copyto_desktop" id="copyto_desktop"></a><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Copy Image File to Desktop</span>
(File View &gt; File &gt; Copy to Desktop)<br>
The current image file is copied to the desktop (<big><span style=
"font-family: monospace;">/home/&lt;user&gt;/Desktop</span></big>).<br>

&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="delete_trash" id=
"trash_image"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Delete/Trash Image File</span>
(File View &gt; File &gt; Delete/Trash Image File)<br>
<img style="width: 300px; height: 105px;" alt="" src=
"images/delete-trash.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
The current file (file view), or the file of a clicked gallery
thumbnail (gallery view), is deleted or moved to trash, depending
on the option selected. Fotoxx uses the Linux desktop standard for
trash. If this works, trashed image files go into the standard
trash location and can be recovered later if wanted. Otherwise,
Fotoxx puts trashed images into a desktop directory named
"fotoxx-trash". You can delete it or move it to your Linux-specific
trash. If both standard and desktop trash do not work, you must
trash the files outside of Fotoxx.<br>
&nbsp; &nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="print_image" id=
"print_image"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Print Image File</span> (File View
&gt; File &gt; Print Image)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 421px; height: 211px;" alt="" src=
"images/print1.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>
<img style="width: 476px; height: 240px;" alt="" src=
"images/print2.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
The print menu brings up a standard Page Setup dialog where you can
select a printer, a paper size (letter, A4, etc.), and orientation
(portrait or landscape). After using the [apply] button, another
dialog starts for entering paper margins and an image scale. The
margins can be used to shrink the image or shift it on the page.
Image scale can be set in the range 5-100%, where 100% means print
the maximum size image that fits within the margins. Smaller values
will shrink the image proportionally. The actual print size (image
width and height in centimeters) is updated in the dialog as
margins and scale are changed, and this can be used to reach a
desired printed image size. After the margins dialog, a Print
dialog starts for the actual printing. This includes paper type and
qality inputs, and a preview of the printed layout which can be
accepted or rejected.<br>
<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Print Calibrated Image</span>
<a name="print_calibrated"></a>(File View &gt; File &gt; Print
Calibrated Image)<br style="font-weight: bold;">
This function works like Print Image File described above, but
before printing you are asked to supply a calibration file name
which is used to adjust image colors prior to printing. The purpose
is to compensate for color distortions caused by the printer. See
the topic <a href="#calibrate_printer">calibrate_printer</a> for
details on how to create a calibration file.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="file_save" id=
"file_save"></a>&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>
<img style="width: 40px; height: 40px;" alt="" src=
"images/save.png" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Save to Disk</span> (File View
&gt; Save)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 311px; height: 158px;" alt="" src=
"images/file-save1.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>
<img style="width: 557px; height: 397px;" alt="" src=
"images/file-save2.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
In the first dialog, select one of the three options: new version,
new file name, or replace file.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">New Version</span>: Save
the current image file with a new version number. File names with
version numbers are formatted "filename.vNN.ext" where NN is a
version number 01 to 99.&nbsp; The 4 characters .vNN are inserted
between the file name and extension. If the file name has no
versions, version .v01 will be created. If file versions are
already present on disk, then the next higher version number is
used. If the file is a JPEG file, the default quality is used (this
value can be set in <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href=
"#user_options">User Options</a>). A keyboard shortcut can be
assigned to this function if desired.<br>
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">New File</span>: The 2nd
dialog shown above will open to save the current image file to a
selected file, which can be the original file, another existing
file, or a new file. An edited image file can be saved in formats
JPEG, PNG and TIFF. JPEG is normally the best option, since these
are compressed to reduce space. You can choose a JPEG quality value
in the range 1-100. Lower values give smaller files and less image
quality. Values above 70 are generally hard to distinguish from 100
(highest quality, largest file size). PNG files are compressed
without any loss of quality and are larger than JPEG files of the
highest quality. TIFF files are uncompressed and larger than JPEG
or PNG. TIFF and PNG files may be saved with 8 or 16 bits per
color. The 16-bit formats only makes sense for files converted from
a RAW format having more than 8 bits per color. It is rare that the
difference between 8 and 16 bits per color can be seen with the
eye. However, an image with higher bits has more latitude when the
brightness level or distribution is altered with a program like
Fotoxx. PNG-16 files are smaller than TIFF-16 but slower to save
due to the compression process. Saving a file as TIFF or PNG can be
quite slow for a large image and a slow computer. If an image has
transparency information (e.g. a Warp function creates a
non-rectangular image shape with transparent peripheral areas), you
should save the image as a PNG file if you want the transparent
areas to be preserved for some later operation. If you use JPEG,
these areas will be black and opaque. JPEG does not support
transparency.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
If <span style="text-decoration: underline;">make current</span> is
checked, the saved file (new file name) will become the current
file. The source file (old file name) remains unchanged. If not
checked, the file is saved with the new name, but the current file
remains the source file (old name). In either case, the edit
history is retained (i.e. Undo and Redo will still work).<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Replace</span>: Save the
current image file back to itself. If a JPEG file, the default
quality is used (this value can be set in <a style=
"font-family: sans-serif;" href="#user_options">User
Options</a>).<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
File sizes for a 15-megapixel image are roughly as follows
(depending on image detail).<br>
The jpeg numbers are the quality value given when the file is saved
to disk.<br>
<table style=
"text-align: left; width: 599px; height: 44px; font-family: sans-serif;"
border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>tiff-16</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>tiff-8</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>png-16</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>png-8</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>jpeg-100</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>jpeg-90</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>jpeg-80</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>jpeg-70</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>112 MB</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>38 MB</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>78 MB</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>21 MB</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>8 MB</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>2 MB</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>1 MB</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>0.7 MB</small></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
The default JPEG quality is used unless you change the value in the
New File dialog. The default value can be set in <a style=
"font-family: sans-serif;" href="#user_options">User Options</a>
(initially 90). You will not be able to see a difference between a
file saved with quality 90 and one with 100, but the difference in
file space is huge. The <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href=
"#technical_notes">Technical Notes</a> section describes potential
loss of image quality from repeated open, edit and save of JPEG
images. At the default quality of 90 this issue can be generally
ignored.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="prev_next" id="prev_next"></a><br>
<img style="width: 40px; height: 40px;" alt="" src=
"images/prev_next.png"><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Previous / Next Image
Button</span> (File View &gt; Prev/Next)<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Keyboard left and right arrow
keys</span><br>
Click with the left or right mouse button to open the previous or
next image file in the current gallery. If the current image has
unsaved edits, you are warned and given the option to cancel this
function. If you proceed, the edits are lost. You must save an
edited image before moving to another image. The keyboard left and
right arrow keys have the same function.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<u>Directory Search</u><b><br></b> If you attempt to go beyond the
first or last image in the current gallery (directory), a popup
message informs you. If you try again to move in the same
direction, the last image file in the next preceding gallery
(directory), or the first image file in the next following gallery,
will be opened. If there is no preceding or following gallery, or
if it has no image files, then nothing is done other than a popup
notification. Note that only the next preceding or following
directory in the parent directory of the current directory
(gallery) is searched. There is no extended search into further
directories or subdirectories. If the current gallery is not a
directory (e.g. the Newest Images gallery), then there is no
preceding or following gallery.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="metadata_menu" id="metadata_menu"></a><br>
<img style="width: 40px; height: 40px;" alt="" src=
"images/metadata.png" vspace="5"><br>
<big><span style="font-weight: bold;">Metadata Menu</span>
<small>(File View &gt; Metadata)</small></big><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Metadata means text data that is stored inside an image file.
Digital cameras create some data automatically, such as date and
time, technical data about the camera and photo parameters, and
location data (if the camera has a GPS receiver). Other data can be
added by the user, such as captions, comments, ratings, and tags
(keywords that can be used to search images, e.g. persons, places,
things, events).<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
There are several <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href=
"#organizing_images">alternatives</a> for organizing a large image
collection so that it can be easily searched. It would be good to
review these before choosing an organization system.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="view_metadata" id=
"view_metadata"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">View Metadata (short)</span> (File
View &gt; Metadata &gt; View Metadata (short))<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif; font-weight: bold;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">View Metadata (long)</span> (File
View &gt; Metadata &gt; View Metadata (long))<br>
<img alt="" src="images/view-metadata.jpg" height="866" width=
"820"><br>
The View Metadata functions will display available metadata for the
current image file. EXIF metadata contains the date and time of a
photo, shutter speed, focal length, pixel dimensions, etc. Digital
cameras store this data inside the image. IPTC metadata contains
tags (from Fotoxx, Photoshop ...) and captions (frequently found in
published images). If an image is edited and then saved, the
metadata is updated and stored with the new image. The View
Metadata short report outputs the most commonly needed data,
including the photo date and time, user-assigned tags and star
rating, comments, caption, and a history of Fotoxx edit functions
that have been applied to the image. The long report reports all
metadata available. The [Extras] button on the short report opens
the dialog shown on the right, where you can add extra items to the
short report. Any item you see in the long report can be added to
the short report. Click an item in the left column to add it to the
right column and to the report. Click an item in the right column
to remove it. Click the entry "Other Item ..." to type-in any item
name not contained in the existing list, which is limited to the
most likely needed items.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Fotoxx uses the following EXIF / IPTC data items for image editing
and searching:<br>
<small><small><small>&nbsp;<br></small></small></small>
<table style=
"text-align: left; width: 570px; height: 162px; font-family: sans-serif;"
border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-weight: bold;"><small>Key
Name</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-weight: bold;"><small>Fotoxx
data input method<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Date / Time
Original</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Edit Metadata function -
image date</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Keywords</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Edit Metadata function -
image tags</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Rating</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Edit Metadata function -
image stars</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>User Comments</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Edit Metadata function -
comments<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; height: 20px;">
<small>Caption-Abstract</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top; height: 20px;"><small>Edit Metadata
function - caption<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Geotags</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Edit Metadata function -
location, geocoordinates<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Image
History<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Fotoxx edit functions add
to this list<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>any key</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Edit Any Metadata, Delete
Metadata</small></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<small><small><small><small>&nbsp;</small></small></small></small><br>

There are also several batch functions for entering data into many
image files at once. These are described below.<br>
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="show_captions" id=
"show_captions"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Show Captions on Image</span>
(File View &gt; Metadata &gt; Show Captions on Image)<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
Show the metadata items IPTC Caption and EXIF User Comments at the
top of each image displayed. This menu is a toggle switch - the
display of captions and comments is set on and off alternatively.
If neither is available, nothing is displayed. If only one is
available, it is displayed. If both are available, they are
displayed on two lines. The lengths are truncated at 200
characters. To see up to 1000 characters, use the <a href=
"#view_metadata">View Metadata</a> function. If Show Captions
switched ON, captions and comments are also displayed during a
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#slide_show">Slide
Show</a>.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="tags_overview" id=
"tags_overview"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Tags Overview</span><br>
The Edit Metadata function (below) is used to add tags to an image.
Read this overview first.<br>
<br>
Image files can have identification or classification tags
(keywords, labels) assigned to them. These can be used to search a
large image collection for those images having desired tags.
Typical tags: the main subject of a photo, the associated event,
the location, the persons or things contained, etc. Tags reside
inside the image metadata (IPTC:keywords). Tags are normally one
word, but a short phrase with imbedded blanks or other delimiters
can be used. Commas and semicolons are recognized internally as
delimiters (separators) between tags, and therefore cannot be used
within a tag. A compound tag like <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">arizona scenery</span> is allowed,
but you should use two tags instead for more flexibility: you can
search for images having either tag or both tags.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Regardless of the physical organization of your images (directory
and file names), tags can be used to create other organizations.
All images having a desired tag or tags can be found quickly and
displayed in an image gallery window, where you can further review
the images and choose those for viewing, editing, or changing their
tags. If you have used directory and file names in a meaningful
way, you can search for images using these names as well as tags.
You can also search images by date, rating, location, and other
metadata items. These need not be duplicated in tags. See <a href=
"#search_images">Search Images</a> below.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Managed Tag
System</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
This is appropriate if you are starting from near nothing and you
are able to plan your tag system before adding tags to your images.
In this system, you create a limited number of tag categories (e.g.
people, places, things, events, holidays, art ...). You then plan
the tags or types of tags that will go into each category. Tags are
created and assigned to a category as needed during the process of
tagging images. An image is tagged by pointing and clicking on the
list of available tags, which is organized by category and
alphabetically within category. If a new tag is needed, it is
created before it can be assigned to an image. The total number of
tags should be less than about 500, to keep the list small enough
for rapid visual location of tags to click on. Searching images by
tags is also done by pointing and clicking on the list of available
tags.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">managed tag system
advantages</span><br>
+ prevent inconsistent tag names (e.g. landscape, scenery)<br>
+ prevent alternate spellings and typos (e.g. susan, susy, scenery,
scenrey)<br>
+ prevent tags that logically include other tags (e.g. landscape,
lake)<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; (this can be planned and deliberate, but should
not happen by accident)<br>
+ searching is reliable because tags do not have the above
errors<br>
&nbsp;<br>
A large tag list (over 500) slows down the process of tagging
images due to the time needed to visually find the tag in the long
list (possibly in a scrolled window). This problem is reduced
somewhat because a few most recently used tags are shown separately
in the edit dialog, where they can be easily seen and chosen. Since
a series of photos made at the same time will likely share many
tags, adding tags to such a series is made easier and faster.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
If tags are broadly defined and fewer in number, search results for
tags will be larger, but using the search results (image gallery
window) to find a smaller subset of images can be quite fast.
Physical file organization is preserved: image files located
together in their directories will also appear together in search
results.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
Images downloaded from the internet often contain tags. These of
course have no organization and are collectively chaotic. If you
use a managed tag system, it is best to review such images and
clean up the tags to conform with your system, or delete them.
Whatever tags are present will be automatically added under the
category "nocatg". If you notice strange tags in your tag list, use
<a href="#search_images">Search Images</a> by tag to find the
images needing tag deletion or renaming.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Random Tag System</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
You may prefer to invent tags as needed with no particular system
in mind. Or you may already have thousands of tags, making a
conversion to a managed tag system difficult (but not impossible,
given a function to mass convert tag names). In this case, you can
simply type tags into your images, creating new tags as needed.
There is still a limited capability to keep tags organized:
existing tags matching the characters you input are shown as soon
as there are only a few possible matches. Example: you type "lan"
and a list of existing matching tags is shown: landscape,
landscapes, Langley ...&nbsp; If one of these is your intention,
you click on it to select the tag. If not, you keep on typing and
eventually press Enter to create a new tag. When searching images
for tags, you can type desired tag names or pick them from the list
of available tags. Available tags matching the first few letters
you type are shown, and you can pick from this list. You cannot
enter a search&nbsp;tag that does not exist in your images.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="geotags_overview" id=
"geotags_overview"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Geotags Overview<br></span> The
Edit Metadata function (below) is used to add geotags to an image.
Read this overview first.<br>
<small><small><small><small>&nbsp;&nbsp;<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;"></small></small></small></small> Modern
cameras can record the location of each photo, using an internal
GPS receiver. Latitude, longitude, city or location, and country
are recorded in the EXIF metadata of the image JPEG or RAW file.
The Edit Metadata function also allows location data to be entered
or revised for any image. Locations may also be specified by
clicking on a map. There are three functions that can find images
for a specified location or region: <a href="#search_images">Search
Images</a>: find images by location name (also multiple names and
partial matches). <a href="#image_locations">Image Locations</a>:
find all images for a country, a country and location, or a
country, location and date range. <a href="#images_by_map">Images
by Map Location</a>: click on a map to show all images within a
range of the clicked location.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="edit_metadata" id=
"edit_metadata"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Edit Metadata</span> (File View
&gt; Metadata &gt; Edit Metadata)<br>
The Edit Metadata function is used to add metadata to an image.<br>
Please read Tags Overview and Geotags Overview (above) before using
Edit Metadata.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 763px; height: 609px;" alt="" src=
"images/edit-metadata.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br clear="all">
Edit Metadata is used to edit the most frequently used metadata:
image date and time, rating, caption, comments, location data, and
tags. The dialog initially shows existing data for the current
image. After making additions or changes, press [Apply] to update
the image file. There is no automatic file versioning for metadata
changes, but if you want a new&nbsp;version, use File Save &gt; New
Version before using [Apply].<br>
<br>
The dialog shows the metadata for the current image in File View,
or for a clicked thumbnail in Gallery View. The dialog updates
itself when a new image is opened or new thumbnail is
clicked.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Existing tags are shown in <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Image Tags</span>. Available tags are
shown in the <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Defined
Tags</span> window below. One of these tags can be added to the
image by clicking it. A tag can be deleted from the image by
clicking it in <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Image
Tags</span>. Tags recently added are shown in <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Recent Tags</span>. This is a
convenience to make adding tags to a new batch of images easier,
assuming that many of the same tags will be used repeatedly. Point
and click the same way.<br>
<br>
If the list of defined tags is long, it may be easier to type the
desired tag into <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Enter
New Tag</span>. Existing tags matching what you have typed so far
will appear in <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Matching
Tags</span>, and you can point and click one of these to add the
tag to the image. If the input tag is new (no matching tag is
shown), press [Add] when the tag is complete. It will be added to
the image and to the list of defined tags under the category
"nocatg".<br>
<br>
If you are using tag categories, you can select a category, and
only those tags will be shown in the list of defined tags. If your
tags list is huge, this can reduce the list to a manageable size
for pointing and clicking.<br>
<br>
The date of the image, if available, is shown as <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Image Date</span>. This may be
entered if missing, or changed. You can enter a full date in the
format yyyy-mm-dd or a shorter format yyyy or yyyy-mm. A missing
month / day is logically equivalent to 01/01 when used as a low
limit for searching, or 12/31 when used as a high limit. The [Prev]
button fills-in the date from the previous data entered. This is to
allow easy dating of a series of images. If time is important, you
can include a time using the format <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">hh:mm[.ss]</span>. You may enter an
optional <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Stars</span>
rating for the image.<br>
<br>
The [Apply] button writes the data to the image file and to the
metadata index file used for searching images.<br>
The&nbsp;[Prev] button can be used to load all available data from
the previous image viewed or edited. This can be used to speed-up
the processing of a group of images sharing much of the same
data.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
The&nbsp;[Manage Tags] button starts the <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Manage Tags</span> dialog.<br>
<small><small><small><small>&nbsp;<span style=
"font-weight: bold;"><br></span></small></small></small></small>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Manage Tags Dialog <a name=
"manage_tags"></a><br>
<img style="width: 560px; height: 360px;" alt="" src=
"images/manage-tags.png" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;"></span> This dialog starts from the
button [manage tags] in the Edit Metadata dialog. You can also
assign categories to tags to help organize them and locate them
more quickly when adding tags to images. They are optional and they
play no role in tag searching: only the tag is stored in an image,
not its category. Typical categories are people, places, things,
events, scenery, buildings, art, etc. To add a new tag with a new
category, enter the category and the tag, then click [create]. The
category can be left blank and the tag will be assigned to
"nocatg". To assign a tag to a different category, click a category
(bold text) or enter a new one, click the tag, and press [create].
The tag will move from the old to the new category. To delete a
tag, click the tag and press [delete]. Tags used in images but not
assigned to a category will appear under "nocatg".<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Note: a newly created tag is appended to the end of the tag list
for its category. The next time fotoxx is started, all categories
and their tag lists are sorted alphabetically, except that "nocatg"
is always last.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Use the [orphan tags] button to list tags that are defined but not
assigned to any images. These may be deleted if no use is
planned.<br>
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Adding Geotags &nbsp;</span>
<a name="adding_geotags"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
The Edit Metadata dialog shows the location data for the current
image, if any. For an image with missing or incorrect location
data, enter a location name (city, park, museum ...) and use the
[Find] button to either complete the data in the dialog, or get a
list of matching locations to choose from (e.g. London, United
Kingdom and London, Canada). The list of locations comes from your
image files, so a location will not be known until it is assigned
to an image for the first time. Partial matches are found, so you
can usually enter a leading substring, e.g. "hono" for Honolulu.
Use the [Apply] button to enter the data into the EXIF metadata for
the current image, and also into the metadata index file for later
searching by location.&nbsp;Use the [Prev] button to fill the
dialog data with the last location used. If the [Find] button does
not find a location (it is not present in any other image), you can
use the [Web] button to find the&nbsp;location data from an
internet web service (MapQuest Open for now, but this could
change). The location data is completed and returned into the
dialog. These names are not standardized in format or language, so
check the returned data for reasonableness and change the spelling
and capitalization if needed. The [Apply] button will add the
location data to the image, and this location will be available for
future use by the [Find] button. If the [Web] button fails, you can
find the location using an internet service, and enter the location
data into the dialog.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Here are two web sites to look-up a location / country (there are
many others):<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;&nbsp; <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href=
"http://www.worldatlas.com/aatlas/findlatlong.htm">http://www.worldatlas.com/aatlas/findlatlong.htm</a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

&nbsp;&nbsp; <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href=
"http://brainoff.com/geocoder/">http://brainoff.com/geocoder/</a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Note for non-English locales: If a comma is used for a decimal
point in latitude / longitude, this is accepted but converted to a
period internally. The web service returns periods.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<br>
Blank the latitude and longitude if you want to save only the
location and / or country name in the image file. If the latititude
/ longitude data is changed from the values returned by [Find], the
new values are saved for this image file. If a location is saved
without latitude / longitude, there will be no location marker on a
map, and finding photos for this location by clicking on a map will
not work (<a href="#images_by_map">Images by Map Location</a>). The
two other method to find photos by location, <a href=
"#search_images">Search Images</a> and <a href=
"#image_locations">Image Locations</a>, will still work.<br>
<br>
Note: The EXIF keyword "city" is used to mean any location name:
city, park, museum, lake, etc. Fotoxx uses the term "location" to
avoid confusion (e.g. city = Yellowstone Park). Internally,
"location" is converted into "city" for metadata storage or
retrieval.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br>
If you change to one of the map views and click on a location, this
location will be inserted into the Edit Metadata dialog. If you
click within a marker (red dot), the location name and
latitude/longitude for that marker will be used. If you click
outside a marker, the clicked latitude/longitude will be used, and
the location name will not be changed.<br>
<br>
If you use the [Find] button to set the dialog location data from a
known location, there are two possible outcomes: if there is only
one geocoordinate (latitude and longitude) associated with the
location, this is returned into the dialog. If there are multiple
geocoordinates, the OSM map is shown and zoomed-in to a scale where
all markers for all geocoordinates associated with this location
are shown. Click within one of the markers to choose the
corresponding geocoordinate, or click outside any marker to set a
new geocoordinate for this image file. The location name now has a
newly associated geocoordinate.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
You can use <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Batch Add
Geotags</span> (see below) to quickly add location data to many
image files at once.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<table style="text-align: left;" height="213" width="822" border=
"0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Summary</span>:<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Enter (or change) a location name (possibly
abbreviated) in the dialog.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Use [Find] to find the location and auto-fill
country, latitude, longitude.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; If there are multiple matches, choose from the
list.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; If there are too many matches, add more letters or
supply the country and try again.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; If there are zero matches (not found), try the [Web]
button (country is required).<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; If still not found, add more letters to the
location.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; If still not found, use one of the above web
services and input the data manually.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; Use [apply] to update the image file and make the
location available for future use.<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; If there are multiple geocoordinates for a given
location and country, click on a map<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; marker to select, or click
elsewhere to add a new geocoordinate for this location.<br></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="edit_any_metadata" id="edit_any_metadata"></a>&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Edit Any Metadata</span> (File
View &gt; Metadata &gt; Edit Any Metadata)<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;"><img style=
"width: 567px; height: 310px;" alt="" src=
"images/edit-any-metadata.jpg" hspace="5" vspace=
"5"></span><br clear="all">
This is a dialog for editing any metadata for the current image
file. The most likely metadata key names are listed. Click one of
these to retrieve the current key value. Change the value if wanted
and press [Save]. The metadata is updated. To edit a key name not
in the list, enter the key name and press keyboard "enter" to
retrieve the present value, if any. Then enter or change the value
and press [Save]. You may enter the key name in lower case and with
or without spaces between the words, e.g. "Bits per Sample" and
"bitspersample" will both work. To see all present keys and data,
use <a href="#view_metadata">View Metadata (long)</a>.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="delete_metadata" id="delete_metadata"></a>&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Delete Metadata</span> (File View
&gt; Metadata &gt; Delete Metadata)<br>
Specify the key name to delete, or select <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">All</span>. The metadata is deleted.
Use <span style="text-decoration: underline;">All</span> to clean
an image of any identifying information that might be in there.
Some keys are not deletable, e.g. <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">File Name</span>.<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="batch_tags" id=
"batch_tags"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Batch Add / Remove Tags</span>
(File View &gt; Metadata &gt; Batch Add/Remove Tags)<br>
<img style="width: 788px; height: 463px;" alt="" src=
"images/batch-tags.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>
When adding tags to a large number of images having many of the
same tags (i.e. the same event or subject), use this function to
speed up the process. In the dialog, use the [select files] button
to open a gallery window with thumbnail images from which you can
select the image files (<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href=
"#gallery_selection">link</a>).<br>
<br>
The dialog shows two lists of tags: those to be added to the
selected image files, and those to be removed. Select whether the
tags you will enter subsequently are to be added or removed. You
can go back and forth as you select tags.<br>
<br>
Available tags are shown in the <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Defined Tags</span> window below. One
of these can be added to the currently selected tag list by
clicking it. A tag can be deleted from either tag list by clicking
it. Tags recently added are shown in <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Recent Tags</span>. This is a
convenience to make adding tags to a new batch of images easier,
assuming that many of the same tags will be used repeatedly. Point
and click the same way.<br>
<br>
If the list of defined tags is long, it may be easier to type the
desired tag into <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Enter
New Tag</span>. Existing tags matching what you have typed so far
will appear in <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Matching
Tags</span>, and you can point and click one of these to add the
tag to the image. If the input tag is new (no matching tag is
shown), press [Add] when the tag is complete. It will be added to
the selected tag list and to the list of defined tags under the
category "nocatg".<br>
<br>
If you are using tag categories, you can select a category, and
only those tags will be shown in the list of defined tags. If your
tags list is huge, this can reduce the list to a manageable size
for pointing and clicking.<br>
<br>
The [manage tags] button can be used to define tags with
categories, as described above in <a href="#edit_metadata">Edit
Metadata</a>.<br>
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
To replace tags, specify the new names in the add tags list and the
old names in the remove tags list. To get a list of images having
specific tags (which you want to remove or replace), use the
<a href="#search_images">Search Images</a> function to find the
images, then start this function and use the [select files] button
to add all the image files that you just found, or select any
subset.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="batch_rename_tags" id="batch_rename_tags"></a><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Batch Rename Tags</span> (File
View &gt; Metadata &gt; Batch Rename Tags)<br>
With this function, you can rename any number of tags and apply
these changes to your entire image collecton. Prepare a text file
with a list of tag names and their replacements. Each line has a
pair of names separated with a comma (old tag name, new tag name).
When the function is started, you will be asked to open this file.
The list of tag names is output to a popup scrolling window,
followed by a list of images that have any of the tag names to be
revised. Inspect this list carefully. If OK, press [proceed]. The
update rate is around 500/minute on a strong computer. The next
time Fotoxx is started, the image index function will update all
thumbnails for the same images, because the file modification date
has changed.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="batch_change_metadata" id=
"batch_change_metadata"></a>&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Batch Add/Change Metadata</span>
(File View &gt; Metadata &gt; Batch Add/Change Metadata)<br>
<img style="width: 540px; height: 315px;" alt="" src=
"images/batch-add-change-metadata.jpg" vspace="5"><br>
This function can revise metadata for multiple image files. You can
add new metadata, revise existing metadata, and delete metadata.
Use the [select files] button to open a gallery window with
thumbnail images from which you can select the image files to be
processed (<a href="#gallery_selection">link</a>). Enter metadata
key names and values to be assigned, or leave the value blank to
delete this key. Press [apply]. You will get a confirmation message
and you can proceed or cancel at this time. A list of commonly used
key names is provided on the left. Click one of these to insert it
into the first empty key name field in the dialog. This list comes
from the file<br>
&nbsp; &nbsp; <span style=
"font-family: Liberation Mono;">/home/&lt;user&gt;/.fotoxx/metadata_short_list</span><br>

which you can edit to add other keys to the list. The [Full List]
button provides information on how to get a list of all available
key names.<br>
&nbsp; &nbsp;<br>
<a name="batch_report_metadata" id=
"batch_report_metadata"></a>&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Batch Report Metadata</span> (File
View &gt; Metadata &gt; Batch Report Metadata)<br>
<img style="width: 262px; height: 114px;" alt="" src=
"images/batch-report-metadata1.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><img alt=
"" src="images/add-metadata-items.jpg" height="308" hspace="5"
vspace="5" width="469"><br>
This function can report any metadata for any number of images. The
output is a text file which is displayed in the default text editor
for your system (e.g. Gedit for a Gnome desktop). You can use the
search features of the text editor to find images matching desired
metadata, or you can use the text file as input to other programs.
Use the [select files] button to open a gallery window with
thumbnail images from which you can select the image files to be
processed (<a href="#gallery_selection">link</a>). You can navigate
through any number of galleries and select any number of image
files in each. The [edit] button opens a new dialog (right) where
you can select the metadata items to be reported. Click an item in
the left column to add it to the right column and to the report.
Click an item in the right column to remove it. Click the last item
in the left column, "Other Item ...", to type-in any item name not
appearing in the list, which contains only the most likely needed
items.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="batch_add_geotags" id=
"batch_add_geotags"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Batch Add Geotags</span> (File
View &gt; Metadata &gt; Batch Add Geotags)<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 454px; height: 204px;" alt="" src=
"images/batch-add-geotags.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br clear=
"all">
With this function, you can select many images and add the same
location data to all of them. Use the [select files] button to
select the image files from a gallery window (<a style=
"font-family: sans-serif;" href="#gallery_selection">link</a>).
Then get the location data as described above in <a href=
"#edit_metadata">Edit Metadata</a>, using the buttons [Find] [Web]
and [Prev], or one of the map views. Press [proceed] to start the
update process. Use this function also to fix inconsistencies in
location spellings or latitude / longitude data.<br>
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="image_locations" id=
"image_locations"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Image Locations (report)</span>
(File View &gt; Metadata &gt; Image Locations)<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 753px; height: 531px;" alt="" src=
"images/image-locations.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br clear="all">
This is a fast way to find all photos made at a given location or
location and date range. In the dialog, select the desired level of
grouping: by country, by country and location, by country and
location and date, or by date and country and location. In the last
two cases, you can select a date range for grouping of images
having nearby dates. A number N will group images together with
dates that are N days or less apart from other images in the group
(i.e. gaps are &lt;= N days).<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
A popup window shows all locations found and the dates of photos
taken in those locations. The count of photos taken is also shown.
In the above example, 29 photos are from Grindlewald in March 2008.
Click on a line in the report to get a thumbnail gallery of those
images, and from there you can click on any image to view or edit.
Note that this method uses only location and country to find the
images. Earth coordinates are not used. If you have images with
missing or inconsistent earth coordinates for a
given&nbsp;location, use this function to get all of them, and then
use <a href="#batch_add_geotags">Batch Add Geotags</a> to make the
earth coodinats consistent.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="image_timeline" id="image_timeline"></a><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Image Timeline (report)</span>
(File View &gt; Metadata &gt; Image Timeline)<br>
<img style="width: 667px; height: 526px;" alt="" src=
"images/timeline-report.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>
This report produces a timeline of image counts by month. Click on
a year and month in the report to get a thumbnail gallery of all
images with a photo date (EXIF) in the selected month. The example
here shows 377 images for May 2016.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="search_images" id=
"search_images"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Search Images (report)</span>
(File View &gt; Metadata &gt; Search Images)<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
Use the Search Images function to find images having any desired
metadata. A metadata index file is used for searching, which makes
it possible to search thousands of images per second. The index
contains a subset of the EXIF and IPTC metadata in the image files.
Some of this data is automatic, created by the camera. Other data,
such as tags and star ratings, can be added by the user.<br>
<br>
There are two report formats: a gallery of thumbnails showing all
images that match the search criteria, or a metadata report which
combines thumbnails with metadata text. Here is an example of the
metadata report format:<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 602px; height: 482px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/search-images-metadata.jpg" hspace="5" vspace=
"5" align="left"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Search Images Dialogs<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img alt="" src="images/search-images.jpg" height="601" hspace="5"
vspace="5" width="853"><br clear="all">
The main dialog is on the left. If the button "search other
metadata" is used, the dialog on the right appears. This can be
used to select metadata that is not available in the main dialog.
Details are given below.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
In the main dialog, select which images to search, either
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">all</span> (the entire
image database) or <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">current set</span>, meaning the
images in the current gallery list, which can be a directory,
album, or the results of a prior image search. Then choose what to
do with the matching images found: <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">new set</span> means replace the
current set with the images found, <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">add</span> means add them to the
current set (gallery), and <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">remove</span> means remove them from
the current set. To remove images, you must search the current
set.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Select the desired <span style="text-decoration: underline;">report
type</span>. The gallery report is a page of thumbnail images, as
long as needed to hold all the images that match the search
criteria. The metadata report has both thumbnail images and a list
of metadata items beside each thumbnail. These are some standard
items (date, rating, tags, geotags, captions, comments) and any
items you added in the optional search
metadata&nbsp;dialog.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Enter your search criteria. Select desired tags, dates, star
ratings, text (comments, captions), file or directory names, and
location names. More details about these are below.<br>
<br>
Press the [proceed] button to perform the search. Matching images
are displayed in gallery view mode. Choose images to view or edit
by clicking the thumbnails. Navigate this set of searched images
using the navigation buttons in the gallery view window, or the
[Prev/Next] button in the file view window. You can save the
searched images as a permanent album, which can be further edited
to add or remove images (see <a style="font-family: sans-serif;"
href="#manage_albums">Manage Albums</a>).<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<br>
Available tags are shown in <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Defined Tags</span> and can be chosen
with point and click. If the list of defined tags is long, it may
be easier to type the desired tag into <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Enter Search Tag</span>. Existing
tags matching what you have typed so far will appear in
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Matching Tags</span>, and
you can point and click one of these to add the tag to the search
list. If you type a tag with no match (it does not exist in any
image), the list of matching tags will be empty.<br>
<br>
If you are using tag categories, you can select a category, and
only those tags will be shown in the list of defined tags. If your
tags list is huge, this can reduce the list to a manageable size
for pointing and clicking.<br>
<br>
A <span style="text-decoration: underline;">date range</span> may
be entered to restrict the search to images within the date range.
The format is yyyymmdd. Images are selected which have a date on or
after the first date, if present, and on or before the second date,
if present. Missing month/day default to 01/01 for the low date
limit and to 12/31 for the high date limit. Times may optionally be
specified using the format yyyymmddhhmm. Missing times default to
00:00 and 23:59.&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
A pair of <span style="text-decoration: underline;">star
ratings</span> may be entered to restrict the results to images
having a star rating within the given range. A missing low value
implies no stars, and a missing high value means the highest
rating, 5 stars.<br>
<br>
If <span style="text-decoration: underline;">last version
only</span> is checked, image files with multiple versions will be
filtered to include only the last version of each file. This
depends on the Fotoxx version naming convention: The original file
name is normally filename.ext, and edited versions are
filename.v01.ext, filename.v02.ext, etc. If no versions are
present, the original file is selected. Otherwise, the last
available version is selected. If this convention is not followed,
then this option will do nothing.<br>
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Image directory and file names may also be searched. In the field
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">search files</span>,
enter any number of names used for your image directories and file
names, separated by blanks.&nbsp;An input of [ egypt cairo ] would
match all image directory or file names containing either of these
strings. Substrings will also match.<br>
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Image comments and captions may also be searched. Enter the words
to search for in the dialog <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">search text</span> field, separated
by blanks. These will be matched to every word in the comments and
captions of all images, and matching images are selected.
Substrings will also match.<br>
<br>
To search locations, enter one or more location or country names in
the <span style="text-decoration: underline;">search
locations</span> field. Only image files with geotags matching one
of the entered locations will be selected.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
The radio buttons <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">all</span> and <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">any</span> apply to tags, text, and
file names. You can select images having ALL the entered strings,
or ANY of the entered strings. Example: if the search file field
contains [egypt cairo] and <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">any</span> is selected, then image
files with either of these names within the directory or file name
would be selected.<br>
<br>
If you wish to find missing data, you can enter "null" as a match
value. "null" is available in the defined tags list.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Search Metadata
Dialog</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
You may use this dialog to search for "extra" metadata items not
present in the main dialog. The items available for any given image
file can be shown using <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href=
"#view_metadata">View Metadata</a> <a style=
"font-family: sans-serif;" href="#view_metadata">(long)</a>. These
include camera make and model, exposure time, F-number, ISO,
metering mode, focal length, shooting mode, etc. etc. You can enter
shortcut names like "exposuretime" instead of "Exposure Time". You
may also enter match criteria, if wanted, so that only the images
with matching metadata are reported. For example, if you enter
"model" with the match value "DMC-FZ28" (a Panasonic camera) then
only the images taken with this camera will be reported.<br>
<br>
The matching logic can be selected for each metadata key:<br>
<table style="text-align: left; width: 694px; height: 102px;"
border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><span style=
"font-weight: bold;">match method</span><br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><span style=
"font-weight: bold;">match value(s)</span><br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>matches<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>one or more metadata text
values to be selected, separated by commas<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>contains<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>as above, but any metadata
containing these text values will be selected<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>number =<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>a single numeric value -
equal metadata values will be selected<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>number
=&gt;<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>a single numeric value -
equal or greater metadata values will be selected<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>number
&lt;=<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>a single numeric value -
less or equal metadata values will be selected<br></small></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Performance</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
If no extra metadata to report is entered, then many thousands of
images per second are searched and reported (assuming a strong PC).
If extra metadata is entered, the search performance slows to
something like 90 images per second. This is because the image
files are being read to extract the metadata not included in the
metadata index. For good performance, always use dates, file names,
etc. to maximize the use of the metadata index and minimize the
number of image files that must be read.<br>
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
There is a separate topic, <a style="font-family: sans-serif;"
href="#organizing_images">image organization options</a>, which
explains the options for using directory and file names and
metadata for image searching.<br>
<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Album "Search Results"</span><br>
The output of Search Images is automatically saved in the album
Search Results. This is for convenience. You may perform a search
and then perform other functions which change the current gallery,
replacing the search results. If you need to refer to the previous
search, this is instantly available in the album Search
Results.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="select_area_menu" id="select_area_menu"></a>&nbsp;<br>
<img style="width: 40px; height: 40px;" alt="" src=
"images/areas.png" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<big><span style="font-weight: bold;">Area Menu</span></big> (File
View &gt; Areas)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="area_overview" id=
"area_overview"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Overview&nbsp;</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
Edit functions normally apply to the entire image, but it is
possible to edit part of an image (an "area") and leave the rest
unchanged. If an image area has been selected, then most edit
functions will work only within this area. Some functions ignore a
selected area. An area may be selected before starting an edit
function, or while an edit function is active. The selected area is
immediately active, prior edits are retained, and future edits will
apply only within the area. If another edit function is started,
the selected area remains active, so it is possible to carry out a
series of edits on one area.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
"Layers" in Photoshop and Gimp are "areas" in Fotoxx. Instead of
selecting something from the image, making a separate layer from
the selection, performing edit functions on the layer and finally
merging the layers, you select something in the image and perform
edit functions on the selection, with WYSIWYG feedback during the
edit. Areas can also be saved to a file, opened and pasted into
other images, and edited there.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="select_area" id=
"select_area"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Select Area</span> (File View &gt;
Areas &gt; Select)<br>
<img style="width: 479px; height: 328px;" alt="" src=
"images/select-area.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Area</span> dialog is
started with the menu Areas &gt; Select. Select one of the 8
methods (explained below). Each method selects image areas in a
different way. You can change methods at any time, and the selected
areas are accumulated. An outline of the selected image area(s) is
shown as you add or remove areas from the selection. The [Finish]
button is used to make the area ready for subsequent image edits
within the area. The [Hide] button removes the area outline, giving
you better visibility of image edits and area edge blending. Use
the [Show] button to show the area outline. The select area dialog
can be exited and re-started later to modify an existing area or
start a new one.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Line
Color</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
The color used for the mouse selection circle and the area outline
can be changed at any time by clicking one of the color buttons.
This allows you to maintain good contrast during pixel selection,
regardless of the brightness or color.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Methods</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
The following methods are used to enclose one or more image spaces
that will belong to the final area. These methods may be used in
any sequence to define spaces that are either joined or detached.
<table style=
"text-align: left; width: 747px; height: 261px; font-family: sans-serif;"
border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;">
<small>&nbsp;Rectangle</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Drag the mouse to
enclose a rectangular area.</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;">
<small>&nbsp;Ellipse</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Drag the mouse to
enclose an elliptical area.</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;">
<small>&nbsp;Freehand Draw &nbsp;</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Drag and click the
mouse to draw lines that outline an enclosed space.</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;">
<small>&nbsp;Follow Edge&nbsp;</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Click or drag along
the edge of an image object to draw lines that follow the
edge.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Replace</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Drag the mouse near
an area edge-line to move the edge to the mouse.</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;">
<small>&nbsp;Select area<br>
&nbsp;within mouse &nbsp;&nbsp;</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Left / right drag to
select / unselect all pixels within the mouse circle.<br>
&nbsp;Selection is independent of color.</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;">
<small>&nbsp;Select one matching<br>
&nbsp;color within mouse</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Click on the image to
select a color. Left / right drag to select / unselect pixels<br>
&nbsp;inside the mouse circle that match the selected color within
"match level".</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;">
<small>&nbsp;Select all matching<br>
&nbsp;colors within mouse</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Left / right drag to
select / unselect pixels surrounding the mouse that match<br>
&nbsp;the color of any pixels inside the mouse circle, within
"match level".</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Controls for
mouse<br>
&nbsp;selection methods<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;"mouse radius" sets
the size of a selection circle around the mouse pointer.<br>
&nbsp;"match level" sets the color match (0-100%) required for
pixel selection.</small></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
The following paragraphs explain the details of each
method.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Rectangle</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

Drag the mouse from one corner to the opposite corner of the
desired rectangular area to select. A rectangle is drawn to enclose
the area. Right-click to delete and start over. Repeat the process
to select more rectangular areas.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Ellipse</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
This works the same as rectangle selection, except that the area
enclosed is an ellipse.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Freehand
Draw</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Drag the mouse (left button down) to draw a freehand (curvy) line,
or left-click to connect a straight line from the last point drawn
to the point clicked. Continue around the target area until it is
surrounded with connected curves and lines. Right click to remove
previous lines (mistakes). A right click will remove the previous
clicked or dragged line, up to 50 pixels. Right click repeatedly to
remove more. A new clicked line will always connect to the end of
the previous line. A new dragged line will connect to the previous
line if it is started close to the end of that line. If it is
started elsewhere, a disconnected line will be drawn. You can start
a new drag from far away and draw back to meet the previous line.
If a clicked line connects to an undesired point (i.e. you don't
want to connect to the last line drawn), right click to erase it
and then use drag to start a new sequence of lines. A right-button
drag can be used to erase small segments: right-drag closely along
a line to erase it, then left-drag to re-draw the line. At the end,
an area must be fully enclosed, with no gaps. Lines that overlap a
little at the ends are OK. Gaps can be difficult to find and
correct, so work at 100% image size or greater and be careful. A
series of lines automatically connected with left clicks will not
leave gaps, but deviation from this sequence is likely to create
gaps. To reduce the possibility of gaps, use deliberate overlaps
when manually connecting lines.<br style=
"color: black; font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Follow
Edge</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
High-contrast pixels (likely object edges) between the last point
drawn and a newly clicked position are found and connected. This is
effective for clear edges that are not too irregular. Fuzzy and
ragged edges may not work well and freehand draw will be needed if
high precision is necessary. The rules for connecting lines are the
same as explained above. Dragging the mouse instead of clicking
works like freehand draw.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Replace</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
Drag the mouse near and along an existing area edge-line. The line
will be erased and redrawn at the mouse pointer. This is a faster
way to make a small adjustment in an existing line.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Select area within
mouse</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Left click or drag will select the pixels enclosed by the mouse
circle. A right click will unselect the last selection (repeat to
unselect more). A right drag will unselect the enclosed
pixels.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Select one matching color
within mouse</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Click on the image to select a color. The color is shown on the
color button. You can also use the button to set a color directly.
Left / right drag to select / unselect pixels within the mouse
circle that match the selected color within <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">match level</span>. Adjust the match
level down / up to match more / fewer pixels.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Select all matching
colors within mouse</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Left / right drag to select / unselect pixels inside the mouse
circle. Pixels beyond the mouse circle are also included if they
meet these conditions: 1) their color matches any color inside the
mouse circle, within the current <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">match level</span>. 2) they are
within <span style="text-decoration: underline;">search
range</span> of the mouse pointer. This is a factor of mouse
radius, e.g. if mouse radius is 20 and search range is 3, then the
search range is 60 pixels from the mouse pointer. Drag the mouse
over new areas you want to include. Watch the selected area expand
into areas with colors matching those inside the mouse circle. If
you go too far, right click to remove the last selection. Repeat if
needed to remove more previous selections. Reduce the radius or
increase the match level to gain finer control - the selection will
expand more slowly and stay closer to the mouse circle. A small
radius and high match level can be used to follow along an edge and
select pixels up to the edge with good precision. Change to a
larger radius and / or lower match level to select larger areas
after the fine work is complete. Right drag acts as an unselect:
pixels inside the mouse circle and matching pixels within the
search range are unselected. If a selection goes too far, it is
often easy to correct this by unselecting from outside the selected
area. You may need some practice to get a feeling for this and be
able to work efficiently.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Mouse Radius and Match
Level</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
These two controls apply only to the <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">select within mouse</span> methods
described above. <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Mouse
radius</span> defines the size of a circle around the mouse
pointer. Pixels within the circle are selected, or they provide a
set of colors for matching and selecting pixels outside the circle.
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Match level</span>
defines a degree of match (0-100%) to select pixels based on their
color and brightness. 0 means anything matches, and 100 means a
perfect match is required.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Summary</span>
<table style=
"text-align: left; width: 719px; height: 65px; font-family: sans-serif;"
border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>&nbsp;
left drag</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>select pixels inside mouse
circle and those with matching colors within search
range</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>&nbsp;
right click</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>undo
previous selection, repeat to unselect more</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>&nbsp;
right drag</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>unselect pixels inside
mouse circle and those with matching colors within search
range</small></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Blend
Width</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Edits made within an area can be blended with the surrounding image
over a distance called <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">blend width</span>. At the edge of
the selected area, the image is the original (unedited) image. At a
distance of <span style="text-decoration: underline;">blend
width</span> from any edge inside the area, the image is the edited
image. For distances in-between, the pixels are a mix of original
and edited pixels with a gradual transition. Use the <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Blend Width</span> control to set the
blend width for the current or subsequent edit functions. Zero
blend width gives a hard edge to the area edit. Increasing blend
width makes the edges of the edit more gradual and harder to
distinguish from the original image. Changing the value for the
first time after editing an area will cause the edge distance to be
calculated for each pixel in the area. This is normally fast (a few
seconds), but it may take minutes if the area is large and has a
complex geometry (a very long edge). Whenever an area is re-edited
or inverted, the edge calculation is discarded and must be repeated
if blending is wanted. If the edge of a selected area is within 4
pixels of the image edge, it is no longer considered an edge for
blending. If a selected area includes a portion of the image edge,
and you do not want blending along this edge (the normal case), be
sure the edge of the area is within 4 pixels of the image
edge.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Edge
Creep</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
An area that has been finished can be expanded or contracted in
1-pixel steps. The area remains finished, but <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">blend width</span> is no longer valid
and must be repeated if needed. This can be helpful to reduce edge
effects when an area selected by matching colors is edited in a way
that changes its brightness. Selection by color may leave a narrow
band of underselected or overselected pixels along an edge where
color has become mixed with background. Expanding or contracting
the area a pixel or two can produce a cleaner looking
edge.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Show /
Hide</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Use [Hide] to hide the area outlines. This is useful when editing
the image / area, to better see the effects of the edit without
interference from the area outlines. Use [Show] to show the
outlines and resume editing the area.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Finish</span><br>
<img style="width: 283px; height: 129px;" alt="" src=
"images/select-area-finish.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5" align=
"left"><br>
<br clear="all">
An area is not effective for edits until it is successfully
finished. The finish process finds all the areas enclosed by your
drawn outlines. When you are finished outlining areas, use the
[Finish] button to complete the process. A popup dialog will ask
you to click the mouse inside each enclosed area in sequence. The
enclosed areas are temporarily colored so you can verify that the
final result is what you intended. Press [keep] when all selected
areas have been clicked and correctly colored. Press [Undo] if a
colored area does not match your intention - the original area
outline is restored. If the outline of an enclosed area has a gap,
the pixel selection and coloring process will "leak out" and areas
outside the enclosure will be colored. In this case, press [Undo]
to go back to the original outline. Find the gap in the outline and
close it, then try [Finish] again. See the function <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Find Area Gap</span> below for a fast
method to find gaps.<br>
<br>
Any enclosed area can be selected, even those not explicitly
outlined - if you have a donut with a hole, you can select the
donut, the hole, or both.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Areas selected using one of the <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">select within mouse</span> methods
are automatically finished whenever you click inside any enclosed
area. These areas are mapped during the selection process, whereas
areas selected with one of the <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">line drawing</span> methods are
mapped only when you click inside them.<br>
<br>
If you draw a line from one image side to another, you can click on
either side of the line to make an area of all pixels on that side
of the line. Example: draw a horizontal line on the boundary
between sky and land. Click above the line to select sky, below the
line to select land.<br>
<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Disable /
Enable</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Disable the current area and keep the data so that it can be
re-activated later. This allows you to alternate edits within a
selected area and edits for the entire image.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Invert</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
This function inverts an existing area: the entire image is
selected except for the existing area. Using the function two times
returns the original selected area. Inverting a selected area
invalidates the edge calculation which will be repeated if edge
blending is selected.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Unselect</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
Discard the current area permanently.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="find_area_gap" id="find_area_gap"></a><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Find Area Gap</span> (File View
&gt; Areas &gt; Find Gap)<br>
If an area outline was created by freehand drawing using multiple
strokes, it is easy to leave small gaps in the outline that are not
visible below 400% zoom. An attempt to finish such an area will
fail because the mapping of the interior pixels will leak out
through the gap and cover large areas not intended as part of the
area. If the <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Finish</span> functioin fails, use
this function to find the gap. Click somewhere on the outline of
the failed area. The outline will be re-drawn in one direction from
the clicked position, until an "end pixel" is found. This is where
the gap is. The function will stop for 2 seconds so you can see
where it stopped drawing, and then the entire area outline will
display again. If you click again near the same position, the
outline will be re-drawn in the opposite direction, again stopping
where an "end pixel" is found. Use the freehand draw tool to close
the gap, then test again to see if the full outline can be drawn
without stopping. This function can be used in parallel with the
Select Area function.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="select_hairy" id="select_hairy"></a><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Select Hairy</span> (File View
&gt; Areas &gt; Select Hairy)<br>
<img style="width: 491px; height: 360px;" alt="" src=
"images/select-hairy.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5" align=
"left">&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br>
<br>
Some of the hair has been selected and<br>
background deselected (made transparent).<br>
<br>
<br>
<br>
<br>
mouse radius for painting selected or<br>
deselected pixels<br>
&nbsp;<br>
mode: select or deselect matching pixels<br>
&nbsp;<br>
colors currently being matched for<br>
selection or deselection<br clear="all">
This is an area selection function for complex boundary cases like
hair or bushy plants, where selection by color may not work well,
and freehand draw would need too much effort. The objective is to
make the background transparent and leave the foreground opaque, or
partly transparent where thin structures fade into the
background.<br>
<br>
Follow these steps:<br>
<ul>
<li>Choose a window background color (<a href="#user_options">User
Options</a>) that contrasts with the complex area to be selected.
In the example above, a white background was chosen to contrast
with the darker hair.<br></li>
<li>Select the entire area to be copied, including the complex
boundary areas.<br></li>
<li>Set a suitable mouse radius for painting over the boundary
areas.<br></li>
<li>Set the initial color match or selectivity levels. 60% is a
good starting point.<br></li>
<li>Choose the select button.<br></li>
<li>Click on an area representative of the colors to be selected,
but away from the irregular edge. About 200 pixels will be sampled
from the clicked position. These are used to determine which colors
will be selected. The selected colors are shown in the box.</li>
<li>Choose the deselect button and set the colors to be deselected
by clicking on the background area.<br></li>
<li>With the deselect button active, left-drag over the boundary
area. Deselected pixels are converted to the window background
color, allowing you to see which pixels are being deselected.</li>
<li>With the select button active, left-drag over the boundary area
to re-select pixels that may have been deselected. Decrease the
match level to select more pixels that are closer to the background
color.<br></li>
<li>Alternate between select and unselect, changing the colors and
the selectivity as needed.<br></li>
<li>Select will increase the opacity of matching pixels that are
partly or fully transparent, and deselect will increase the
transparency of matching pixels that are partly or entirely
opaque.<br></li>
<li>Adjust the match levels to higher values to get increased
selectivity. This is needed if foreground and background pixels
have closely matching color and brightness.<br></li>
<li>If the background color varies, click on each background color
and drag to make it transparent. The area affected will be smaller
or larger for match level set higher or lower, respectively.</li>
<li>Use right drag to unselect (restore original image), left drag
to re-select.</li>
<li>When done, save the completed area with the <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Copy</span> button (for subsequent
Paste Area) or the <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Save</span> button (for subsequent
Open Area File).<br></li>
<li>To paste the area into another position or image, use the Areas
menu <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Paste Area</span> or
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Open Area
File</span></li>
</ul>
When the area is pasted into the target image, the paste dialog can
be used to further blend the edges if needed.<br>
<br>
If the contrast between foreground and background is poor, this
process can be difficult and patience will be required to get good
results (good discrimination between foreground and background).
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">This process can be
tedious</span>, and your speed will improve with experience as you
gain an intuitive understanding of how the process works.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="area_show_hide" id=
"area_show_hide"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Area Show / Hide</span> (File View
&gt; Areas &gt; Show, Hide)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Show or hide the outline of the current area. Hiding the area is
useful when the area is being modified with one of the edit
functions. This makes it easier to judge the effects of the edit.
These are also available as buttons in the Select Area
dialog.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="area_enable_disable" id=
"area_enable_disable"></a>&nbsp;<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Area Enable / Disable</span> (File
View &gt; Areas &gt; Enable, Disable)<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
Disable the current area and keep the data so that it can be
re-activated later (Enable menu). This allows you to alternate
edits within a selected area and edits for the entire image. These
are also available as buttons in the Select Area dialog.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="area_invert" id=
"area_invert"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Area Invert</span> (File View &gt;
Areas &gt; Invert)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Invert an existing area: the entire image is selected except for
the existing area. Using the function two times returns the
original selected area. Inverting a selected area invalidates the
edge calculation which must be repeated if edge blending is
desired. This is also available as a button in the Select Area
dialog.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="area_unselect" id=
"area_unselect"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Area Unselect</span> (File View
&gt; Areas &gt; Unselect)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Permanently discard the current area. This is also available as a
button in the Select Area dialog.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="area_copy_paste" id="area_copy_paste"></a><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Area Copy and Paste</span> (File
View &gt; Areas &gt; Copy Area, Paste Area)<br>
A selected area can be saved to a cache file using the menu Select
&gt; Copy Area. This area can be pasted into the same or another
image using Select &gt; Paste Area. Click and drag to position the
area. The dialog controls can be used to resize, rotate, and change
the brightness of the pasted area. The edge blend control allows
you to blend the area edges into the background image if
wanted.<br>
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="area_open_save" id=
"area_open_save"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Area Open and Save</span> (File
View &gt; Areas &gt; Open Area File, Save Area
File)&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
A selected area can be saved to an image file using the menu Save
Area File. You are asked to supply a file name. A PNG file is
created. The PNG file has an alpha channel (a 4th 'color') for
transparency information. The image is a rectangle enclosing the
selected area. Selected pixels are opaque, and others are
transparent. These files reside in&nbsp;
/home/&lt;user&gt;/.fotoxx/saved_areas&nbsp; by default, but you
can save them anywhere.<br>
<br>
Use the menu Open Area File to paste a saved area onto the current
image file. The background image will show through the transparent
parts of the pasted area. Click and drag to position the area. The
dialog controls can be used to resize, rotate, and change the
brightness of the pasted area. The edge blend control allows you to
blend the area edges into the background image if wanted.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a name="edit_menu" id="edit_menu"></a>&nbsp;<br>
<img style="width: 36px; height: 36px;" alt="" src=
"images/edit.png" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<big><span style="font-weight: bold;">Edit Menu</span> <small>(File
View &gt; Edit)</small></big><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="trim_rotate" id=
"trim_rotate"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Trim (Crop) and Rotate
Image</span> (File View &gt; Edit &gt; Trim/Rotate) (key
T)&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 849px; height: 292px;" alt="" src=
"images/trim-rotate.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
This function is used to remove unwanted image margins and / or
rotate to upright or level the image.<br>
<br>
When the dialog opens, a <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">selection rectangle</span> is placed
over the image. The areas outside this rectangle are darkened and
represent the parts of the image that will be removed. Drag any
corner of the rectangle to move that corner. The dialog box shows
the current width / height ratio of the selection rectangle. If the
box lock ratio is checked, then moving one corner of the rectangle
will also move the opposite corner to keep the same ratio. You can
also drag from the middle of the rectangle to shift the whole
rectangle without changing its dimensions. You can use the width
and height spin buttons to adjust the pixel dimensions (or type-in
new values), and the selection rectangle will adjust to these.<br>
<br>
You can use the keyboard arrow keys to move a corner of the
selection rectangle in 1-pixel steps. The last corner moved with
the mouse is the one that is moved with the keyboard.<br>
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
The [Max] button resets the trim rectangle to the full image size
(useful if you want only to rotate the image). The [Invert] button
will invert the width / height ratio (e.g. 2.0 to 0.5). The [Prev]
button retrieves the width and height values last used for a
previous image (useful for setting multiple images to the same
size, e.g. to fit a monitor or beamer).<br>
<br>
The [Auto] button will automatically set the trim rectangle to omit
black margins left over from composite and warp functions. These
functions leave black margins where images did not overlay or were
bent away from the edge. [Auto] tries to find a maximum rectangle
that does not overlap any of the black margin areas. This may or
may not be the desired margins, so you can keep them or move them
with the mouse before committing with the [Done] button.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
The six <span style="text-decoration: underline;">ratio
buttons</span> allow you to choose a preset width / height ratio.
You can change the ratio button names and the corresponding ratios
with the button [customize] which starts a new dialog shown on the
right. Enter desired button labels in the first row, and
corresponding width / height ratios in the second row (the default
names are the same as the ratios, except for "gold"). The [gold]
button uses the golden ratio, about 1.62:1. You do not have to keep
it.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
To level a tilted image, use the mouse to drag the right edge up or
down until the image looks level. Use the 90º and 180º buttons to
upright an image made with the camera turned. The degrees control
can be used to set any angle, -180 to +180 degrees. No resolution
is lost with 90 degree rotation. For other angles, the loss of
resolution is about 1/2 pixel. The <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">level</span> button can automatically
level the image if the camera used provides the needed information
(EXIF roll angle).<br>
<br>
The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">auto-trim</span>
option automatically cuts off the edges (making them perfectly
horizontal and vertical) when an image is rotated a small amount to
make it level.<br>
<br>
A <span style="text-decoration: underline;">left-click</span> on
the image will add vertical and horizontal guide lines to help with
image leveling. Use <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">right-click</span> to remove
them.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a name="upright" id="upright"></a>&nbsp;<br clear="all">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Upright</span> (File View &gt;
Edit &gt; Upright)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 331px; height: 92px;" alt="" src=
"images/upright.jpg" vspace="5"><br>
This dialog is a faster way to upright an image that is turned 90
or 180 degrees.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
The Upright button will take the correct action automatically if
the image EXIF data is correct (normally yes). This function is
available in the right-click popup menus for the main image window
and gallery thumbnails.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="voodoo" id=
"voodoo"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Voodoo 1</span> (File View &gt;
Edit &gt; Voodoo 1)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
This is a fast automatic image enhancement with limited capability.
This is sometimes effective and "good enough" for rapidly
processing many photos. There is no dialog - the modification is
simply done when the menu is selected. Reject the change with the
[undo] button if desired. The modification consists of a slight
flattening of the brightness distribution, an expansion of the
brightness range if less than the full range is used, and a slight
increase in the color saturation, more for darker areas of the
image than brighter areas. The effect is sometimes minimal or even
negative.<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">&nbsp;<br>
Voodoo 2</span> (File View &gt; Edit &gt; Voodoo 2)<br>
This is an alternative automatic enhancement, using the <a href=
"#zonal_flatten">zonal flatten</a> method described
below.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="retouch_combo" id=
"retouch_combo"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Retouch Combo</span> (File View
&gt; Edit &gt; Retouch Combo) (key R)&nbsp;<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
This function handles all aspects of adjusting image brightness and
color: overall brightness and contrast, brightness curves (overall
and per color), color saturation, color temperature, white balance
and black level.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 262px; height: 415px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/retouch-combo.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5" align=
"left">&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
brightness curves, overall and by RGB color<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
x-axis is initial brightness, y-axis is revised
brightness<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
This example shows a reduction of brightness for<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
darker image areas, and an increase for brighter areas.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br>
<br>
<br>
Use the sliders for brightness and contrast to optimize<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
the image. This may be adequate for most photos.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
To fine tune brightness and contrast, edit the curves<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
using the mouse.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<table style=
"text-align: left; width: 746px; height: 227px; font-family: sans-serif;"
border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>amplifier<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>increases or decreases the
effect of the brightness edit curves<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>brightness<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>moves the entire curve up
or down<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>contrast<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>moves the curve lower and
upper parts in opposite directions<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>low color /
high<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>increases or decreases
color saturation<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>warmer /
cooler<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>adjusts color temperature
(reddish &lt;--&gt; blueish)<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>dark
areas / bright<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>apply color changes to
darker / all / brighter image areas<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>brightness
distribution<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>show a brightness
distribution graph in the curve edit window<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>click for white
balance<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>enables the mouse to click
on a black point or gray / white point<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Settings
File<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>dialog settings can be
saved in a file and loaded later for use with other
images<br></small></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
After making initial adjustments using the sliders, you can fine
tune brightness and contrast by editing the curves with the mouse
to change which parts of the image have increased or decreased
brightness or contrast. The ALL curve adjusts all colors, and the
RGB curves adjust individual colors. Use ALL first, then make
revisions using RGB.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Dark - Bright</span>
image areas<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
This modifies the operation of the color adjustments to affect
primarily darker or brighter image areas. Leave in the middle to
adjust all areas equally.<br>
<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Brightness
Distribution</span><br>
If checked, a brightness distribution graph is drawn inside the
curve edit window. The graph is live and changes as the dialog
controls are changed. The edit curve overlays the graph and may
still be edited.<br>
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Click for white balance
or black level</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
If checked, mouse clicks on the image are used to set a black point
and / or white balance (otherwise clicks on the image will zoom the
image as usual). If you click on a fairly bright gray or white spot
on the image, this will be used as a white balance set point, and
the image RGB colors will be shifted to make this spot pure gray or
white. This is the easiest way to correct a photo with an overall
color tint because of bad lighting. You can use the <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">warmer-cooler</span> slider after
clicking, and this correction will be added to the prior result. If
you click on a very dark spot on the image, this will be used as a
black set point, and the image RGB colors will be shifted to make
this spot black. This is one way to reduce fogginess in a photo, or
make the background sky look black instead of gray in an astronomy
photo. The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">All</span>
curve base node will be shifted to the right to reflect the new
black point.<br>
<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Settings File</span><br>
Load button - load all dialog settings (including the curves) from
a file chosen by the user<br>
Save button - save all dialog settings to a file chosen by the
user<br>
This can help speed up processing when the same or similar settings
can be used for multiple photos made under the same conditions.<br>
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Buttons</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
Reset - set all controls back to a neutral position - image is also
reset<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Prev - set all controls to the values used for the previous
image<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Done - finish the edit, close the dialog, save the control
settings<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Cancel - cancel the edit, reset the image, close the
dialog<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
You can use the [Prev] button when processing a series of images
made under the same lighting and therefore needing the same or
nearly the same adjustments.<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="edit_brightness" id=
"edit_brightness"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Edit Brightness
Distribution</span> (File View &gt; Edit &gt; Edit
Brightness)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 571px; height: 208px;" alt="" src=
"images/adjust-britedist.jpg" vspace="5"><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
With this function you can directly alter the shape of the
brightness distribution. Move the sliders and watch the image to
find the optimum settings.<br>
<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Cutoff</span>: If the
distribution is low or zero at the dark or bright end, you can
stretch the distribution to make it extend more into the dark or
bright end, or both.<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;"><br>
Flatten</span>: This is a fast and easy way to compensate for a
common limitation in photos: the brightness range is inadequate, or
areas of the image have nearly the same brightness and details are
lost. Pixel brightness is redistributed so that each brightness
level is more equally represented. Technically, the brightness
distribution is made more uniform (flatter). You can flatten any or
all three ranges of brightness.<br>
<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Stretch</span>: The
selected low / mid / high brightness region is broadened, which
necessarily squeezes adjacent areas. For example, if you broaden
the low brightness region, darker areas of the image will have more
contrast at the expense of mid- and high brightness
areas.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>
<a name="zonal_flatten" id="zonal_flatten"></a><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Zonal Flatten</span> (File View
&gt; Edit &gt; Zonal Flatten)<br>
<img style="width: 372px; height: 442px;" alt="" src=
"images/zonal-flatten2.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5" align=
"left"><img style="width: 268px; height: 160px;" alt="" src=
"images/zonal-flatten1.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>
<br>
<br>
<br>
<br>
<br>
<br>
<br>
<br>
<br>
<br>
<br>
<br>
<br>
<br>
<br>
<br>
Zonal Flatten enhances visible detail in areas having poor
contrast. It is similar to <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Flatten</span>, described above, but
is more effective for an image already having a wide overall
brightness distribution. The revised brightness for a pixel is
based on the brightness distribution for nearby zones. A larger
zones value calculates new pixel values from closer areas. Flatten
controls the strength of the effect, and deband moderates darker or
brighter image areas. This function can amplify noise in uniform
areas like sky. If the deband control is insufficient, use <a href=
"#select_area">Select Area</a> and <a href="#denoise">Denoise</a>.
Alternatively, use Select Area beforehand to select sky (or other
areas to omit) and then invert the selection prior to using Zonal
Flatten.<br>
&nbsp;<br clear="all">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Technical
Explanation</span> (optional)<br>
The image is divided into area zones according to the input zone
count. Each pixel is adjusted based on the 9 closest zones, the 3x3
zones surrounding the zone of the pixel. More zones means smaller
and closer zones. The brightness of a pixel is compared to the
brightness distributions of the nearby zones, and the brightness is
adjusted up or down in the direction that would flatten the
distribution if the pixel were really a member of the nearby
distributions. The influence of the 9 zones are weighted based on
their distance from the pixel being calculated. The influence of
the leftmost zones goes to zero for a pixel on the right edge of
its zone. The same is true for the topmost zones, etc. This
prevents abrupt transitions that could be visible. The nature of
human vision hides the radical alterations in pixel brightness,
since the eye also judges the brightness of a spot based on its
surroundings. A larger number of zones will make each pixel
brightness adjustment depend on areas closer to the pixel.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="tone_mapping" id=
"tone_mapping"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Tone Mapping</span> (File View
&gt; Edit &gt; Tone Mapping)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 300px; height: 300px;" alt="" src=
"images/tone-mapping.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><img alt="" src=
"images/tone-mapping2.jpg" height="281" hspace="5" vspace="5"
width="489"><br clear="all">
Tone mapping increases the apparent brightness range of an image by
increasing local contrast. It is especially useful to improve HDR
images, but can also be applied to any image. Tone Mapping
increases the contrast between nearby pixels without increasing the
overall contrast. It relies on the nature of human vision: contrast
within a small angle is perceived more strongly than contrast over
a large angle. Tone mapping can bring out subtle details (low
contrast) that would otherwise be hard to notice. Other methods can
also be used: <a href="#retouch_combo">Retouch Combo</a> can
increase the contrast for a selected brightness range (at the
expense of others). <a href="#zonal_flatten">Flattening</a> the
brightness distribution can spread the available contrast
(brightness range) more evenly. These methods operate globally: all
pixels of a given brightness are processed the same. Tone mapping
processes pixels relative to surrounding pixels, and is more
effective at enhancing detail and the perceived brightness
range.&nbsp;<br>
<br clear="all">
In the dialog, the graphic curve determines how much local contrast
is increased depending on initial local contrast. The left end of
the x-axis corresponds to low-contrast pixels and the right end
high-contrast pixels. Raise the left side of the curve to increase
the contrast of low-contrast pixels (but this will also enhance
low-level noise). The <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Amplify</span> slider below the curve
regulates the internal algorithmic calculation, from no contrast
amplification on the left to full amplification on the right. If
moved too far to the right, the image may show ugly artifacts, so
push it back until these disappear. The curve can be dragged with
the mouse and its effect on the image will show up in a second or
so (depending on image size and CPU speed). The Amplify slider also
needs time to show up in the image. If more contrast is wanted,
raise the curve. If uniform areas (e.g. sky) become mottled, pull
the left end of the curve down to reduce amplification for
low-contrast pixels. In some cases it will be best to select
different areas of the image and process them separately, e.g. more
conservative for sky, more aggressive for textured surfaces like
stone walls and vegitation.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="resize_image" id=
"resize_image"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Resize Image</span> (File View
&gt; Edit &gt; Resize)<br>
(also called rescale)&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 358px; height: 235px;" alt="" src=
"images/resize.jpg" vspace="5" align="left"><br clear="all">
This function resizes the image to a new pixel width and height.
You can input the new dimensions directly or choose a percent
change. Buttons are present for setting the new size to a simple
ratio of the original size. Using one of these will minimize loss
of resolution. The [Prev] button recalls the previous size, a
convenience if multiple images are being set to the same size. If
the lock ratio box is checked, the current width / height ratio
will be preserved if either width or height is changed. The change
is made immediately, but the image will look the same unless it
becomes smaller than the window. The image file size in the top
panel is not updated until the modified image is saved.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; &nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="flip_image" id=
"flip_image"></a>&nbsp;&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Flip Image</span> (File View &gt;
Edit &gt; Flip)&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Choose either horizontal or vertical flip from the dialog. The
image is reversed (mirrored) vertically or horizontally. Repeating
the flip restores the original image. Doing both a horizontal and
vertical flip is the same as a 180 degree rotation.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; &nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="add_text" id=
"add_text"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Add Text to Image</span> (File
View &gt; Edit &gt; Add Text)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img alt="" src="images/add-text.jpg" height="389" hspace="5"
vspace="5" width="475"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear=
"all">
This function writes text directly on the image. Enter the text
into the dialog. Multiple lines can be used. After entering the
text, left-click the mouse where you want the text on the image.
Click or drag to move the text elsewhere. Right click to remove the
text. Use the [Font] button to select a different font. Use the
[Size] control to increase or decrease the text size. Use the
[Angle] control to change the slant angle of the text. The other
controls allow you to provide a background color around the text, a
text outline color, and a shadow effect. You can select the color
and transparency for all of these. The <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">width</span> control adjusts the
width of outlines and shadows. The <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">shadow angle</span> control sets the
slant angle of the shadow.<br>
<br>
You can initialize the text from any available metadata in the
image file. Enter the <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">metadata key</span> (e.g. "user
comments") and press [Fetch]. Case and embedded blanks do not
matter, so you can abbreviate key names, e.g. "usercomments"
instead of "User Comments".<br>
<br>
The [Open] and [Save] buttons start a file chooser dialog with
which you can load or save all text data from or to a file. All the
items in the dialog are loaded or saved, so you can keep a
collection of often-used text strings and settings.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
The buttons at the bottom work as follows:<br>
<table style="text-align: left; width: 635px; height: 158px;"
border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Clear<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Clear the text and metadata
fields to blank.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Replace<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Image with added text
replaces (overwrites) the current image file<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>+Version<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Image with added text is
saved as a new file version<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Next<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Open the next sequential
image file and place the same text at the same
position.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Apply<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Complete the edit and start
over. A new text string can now be added to the
image.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Done<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Complete the edit and exit
the dialog. The edited image file must be explicitly
saved.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Cancel<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Abandon the edit. Previous
use of [Apply] is not reversed.<br></small></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
&nbsp;<br>
To add the same text to a series of images: prepare and position
the text, press [Replace] or [+Version], then [Next], then
[Replace] or [+Version], then [Next] ...<br>
&nbsp;<br>
Making a Watermark: Use a text transparency of 70% or more and a
background transparency of 100%. The text should be faint but
readable. To add a "relief" effect, use <a href=
"#select_area">Select Area</a> to put a box around the text and
<a href="#embossing">Embossing</a> to give the text an appearance
of depth. &nbsp; &nbsp;<br>
<img style="width: 483px; height: 216px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/add-text2.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5" align=
"left"><br>
<br clear="all">
<br>
<a name="add_lines" id="add_lines"></a>&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Add Lines / Arrows to Image</span>
(File View &gt; Edit &gt; Add Lines)<br>
<img alt="" src="images/add-lines.jpg" height="372" hspace="5"
vspace="5" width="460"><br clear="all">
This function writes lines or arrows directly on the image. Enter a
line length and width into the dialog, and select an arrow head if
wanted. Left-click the mouse where you want to place it on the
image. Drag the ends of the line/arrow to position it on the image.
Right click to remove it. The dialog controls allow you to provide
a background color, an outline color, and a shadow effect. You can
select the color and transparency for all of these. The
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">width</span> control
adjusts the width of outlines and shadows. The <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">shadow angle</span> control sets the
slant angle of the shadow. The [apply] button makes the current
line / arrow permanent, so you can start a new one without leaving
the dialog.&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br>
The [Open] and [Save] buttons start a file chooser dialog with
which you can load or save all line attributes from or to a
file.<br>
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="paint_edits" id=
"paint_edits"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Paint Edits</span> (File View &gt;
Edit &gt; Paint Edits)&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 345px; height: 199px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/paint-edits.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5" align=
"left"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
Use this function in combination with some other edit function.
Start an edit function and leave the controls in a neutral
position. Then start Paint Edits. Specify a <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">mouse radius</span> and <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">power</span> factors for the mouse
center and radius edge. The mouse pointer will be surrounded by a
circle with the specified radius. When the mouse is dragged over an
area of the image, the current retouch function is applied within
the circle. The strength of the function is regulated by the power
factors. Typically you will use a high value at the center and zero
at the edge, meaning that the strength of the edit will be maximum
at the center, changing gradually to zero at the edge of the
circle. As you drag the mouse over the same area repeatedly, the
edits are slowly accumulated. For example, if the edit function is
Retouch Combo, and the brightness curve is moved upward (brighten),
then the image will slowly brighten in the area where the mouse is
dragged. This is called dodge and burn in some image
editors.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Use the [undo] and [redo] buttons to monitor the change, which may
be hard to notice at first. Set the center power to 100 to make
faster changes (with less fine control). Use a left-button drag to
weaken the edit or ultimately erase it. When done using one edit
function in one or more image areas, use the [done] button on the
edit dialog to complete the edit. Use the [reset area] button on
the Paint Edits dialog to erase the active area that is now left
over from the mouse dragging. If you leave this area active and
start a new edit function, the results may be strange (the new
function applies immediately to previously painted
areas).<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
A suggested approach is: (1) start an edit function and leave the
controls in a neutral position, (2) start the Paint Edits dialog,
(3) drag the mouse over the desired areas and watch the effect, (4)
adjust the edit function controls, (5) alternate between the
previous two steps. (6) Exit from the edit function, then from
Paint Edits.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
This method to "paint" edits incrementally can improve selected
areas of an image quickly and easily. It works with the following
edit functions: Retouch Combo, Zonal Flatten, Tone Mapping,
Sharpen, Denoise, Adjust HSL, Color Depth. Others may be added in
the future.<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a name="leverage_edits" id="leverage_edits"></a> &nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Leverage Edits</span> (File View
&gt; Edit &gt; Leverage Edits)<br>
<img style="width: 344px; height: 326px;" alt="" src=
"images/leverage-edits.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5" align=
"left"><br clear="all">
It is sometimes effective to apply an edit function "leveraged" by
some image attribute, e.g. apply noise reduction to darker areas of
the image while leaving brighter areas alone. To do this, use
Leverage Edits. Choose brightness or contrast as the lever. This
may be for a single RGB color or for all colors. The editable graph
controls how subsequent edits are applied to the image. The x-axis
is the selected lever, from minimum to maximum value. The y-axis
value governs how strongly an edit function affects a pixel having
the value on the x-axis. Example: apply tone mapping primarily to
dark pixels: Start Tone Mapping, then start start Leverage Edits
and drag the curve so that high values are on the left (dark
pixels) and low values are in the middle and on the right (bright
pixels). You can edit the leverage curve or the tone mapping curve
while watching the resulting image.<br>
<br>
This function can be used with the same list of edit functions
listed in the Paint Edits topic above.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="plugins" id=
"plugins"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Plugins</span> (File View &gt;
Edit &gt; Plugins)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 423px; height: 138px;" alt="" src=
"images/plugins.jpg" vspace="5"><br>
The Plugins menu is on the left. The top entry <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Edit Plugins</span> leads to the
dialog on the right. In this dialog you can define menu names and
associated commands for using other image edit programs within
Fotoxx. These menus are added to the Plugins menu. The example
shown is a menu named "auto-gamma" which starts the command
"mogrify -auto-gamma %s" (an ImageMagick function). The "%s" is a
placeholder where Fotoxx will insert the name of a temporary copy
of the current file in Fotoxx. The called edit program must process
the file and replace it with the edited version. Normally this is
done by using the program's File &gt; Save menu. Afterwards, you
can use the Fotoxx [Undo] and [Redo] buttons to check the results,
perform additional edits with Fotoxx, or use [Save] to save the
edited image. The image passed by Fotoxx to the external program is
a TIFF file with 16 bits per color. Most programs can read this
file but may use only 8 bits. When finished using the external
program, save the image back to itself using the File &gt; Save
menu, and then exit the program. Fotoxx will pick up the revised
file and use it as though the edit had been done in Fotoxx. Note
that in Gimp you must use the File &gt; Export menu to save the
image back to the original input file (File &gt; Save produces an
.xcf file).<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
To add a new plugin, input a menu name and the corresponding
command in the Edit Plugins dialog and press the [Add] button.
Wherever %s is placed in the command, the file to process will be
inserted. Some commands may expect an input and output file to be
specified. In this case supply %s in both positions (the output
file replaces the input file). You may omit %s if the command does
not edit an image file. A warning is given, which you can ignore if
this is really your intention.<br>
<br>
To modify an existing plugin, select the menu name from the
drop-down list. The corresponding command will be shown. Modify the
command and press [Add]. You can remove a plugin by selecting it
and then pressing the [Remove] button.<br>
<br>
A few examples are provided in the initial Fotoxx installation:<br>
<table style="text-align: left; width: 494px; height: 52px;"
border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style=
"vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace; font-weight: bold;">
Menu Name<br></td>
<td style=
"vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace; font-weight: bold;">
command line<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">
Gimp<br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">gimp
%s<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">
auto-gamma<br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">mogrify
-auto-gamma %s<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">
Gthumb<br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">gthumb
%s<br></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<br>
The plugin menu is saved in the file&nbsp;
/home/&lt;user&gt;/.fotoxx/plugins&nbsp; which you can modify with
a text editor if desired. This is the only way to change the
sequence of the menu entries. Be careful not to screw up the
format.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="repair_menu" id="repair_menu"></a>&nbsp;<br>
<img style="width: 40px; height: 40px;" alt="" src=
"images/repair.png" vspace="5"><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<big><span style="font-weight: bold;">Repair Menu</span></big>
(File View &gt; Repair)<br>
&nbsp;<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="sharpen_image" id=
"sharpen_image"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Sharpen Image</span> (File View
&gt; Repair &gt; Sharpen)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 322px; height: 380px;" alt="" src=
"images/sharpen.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br clear="all">
This function has four methods to sharpen a blurry image.<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;"><br>
Unsharp mask</span>: a fast and effective method also found in
other image editing apps.<br>
A technical description can be found via Google.<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;"><br>
Gradient</span>: steepens brightness transition areas directly,
somewhat like tone-mapping.<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;"><br>
Kuwahara</span>: small neighborhoods of pixels above, below, left
and right of a pixel are compared to each-other. The pixel is given
the mean color of the neighborhood with the smallest variance in
brightness. This forces pixels on a blurry edge to move to one side
of the edge or the other. Edges are made very sharp, but details
can be lost.<br>
<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Median diff</span>: pixel
brightness is compared to the median of pixels within radius. The
brightness is revised up or down for pixels above or below the
neighborhood median. The magnitude of the revision is proportional
to the brightness difference and the input values <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">dark</span> and <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">light</span>. The effect is similar
to unsharp mask, but the "halo" side-effect is greatly reduced.
This method is much slower than the others, especially if a large
radius is used. This is because pixel brightness values must be
sorted in order to find the median value.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">radius</span> value
limits the distance over which pixels around an edge are changed.
It should be small for images that are slightly fuzzy and larger
for poorer images. <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Amount</span> controls the strength
of the modification. <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Threshold</span> suppresses changes
to low-contrast pixels: a higher values reduces the amplification
of low-level irregularities (image noise, uneven skin tones,
etc.).<br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Choose the method, set the parameters, press [apply] and wait a few
seconds to see the result. Make changes and repeat the process
until satisfied. You can go back and forth among the methods to
compare which is best for a given image. Use <a style=
"font-family: sans-serif;" href="#select_area">Select Area</a> to
operate on different parts of an image with different methods and
parameters.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="blur_image" id=
"blur_image"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Blur image</span> (File View &gt;
Repair &gt; Blur)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
This function can be used to blur or un-sharpen an image. Each
pixel is mixed with neighboring pixels to reduce the differences,
making edges fuzzy. Enter a value for <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">blur radius</span> and press [apply]
to see the results. A small value mixes each pixel with its nearest
neighbors and larger values mix more distant pixels. The
contribution from each pixel decreases with distance, so the
nearest pixels have the greatest contribution. This function is
useful to smooth mottled skin tones. You can use <a href=
"#select_area">select area</a> to limit the blur to a face or part
of a face.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="denoise" id=
"denoise"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Denoise Image</span> (File View
&gt; Repair &gt; Denoise)<br>
<img style="width: 306px; height: 249px;" alt="" src=
"images/denoise.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5" align="left"><img style=
"width: 298px; height: 439px;" alt="" src="images/denoise2.jpg"
hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>
This function reduces the noise in photos taken under poor lighting
conditions, making uniform surfaces appear speckled. It also works
for scanned prints, as in the example here. Multiple methods are
provided because the best method varies with image noise
characteristics. Mixing methods (using one and then another) is
often helpful. Choose the method, set the radius or threshold
parameter, and press [apply]. Each new [apply] uses the modified
image from the previous [apply], so each use will have increasing
impact. With a large image, some methods may be slow. To save time,
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#select_area">select</a>
a small area and experiment with the different methods and settings
until you make a decision, then apply the chosen method to the
entire image.<br>
<br>
The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">dark areas</span>
slider can be used to restrict the process to darker image areas,
which are most prone to noise. If left at the right end, all areas
are processed. Move it back to the left to process increasingly
darker areas only.<br>
<br>
The [measure] button starts a dialog to measure the actual noise
level. Click on the image to show the RGB noise levels in the area
of the mouse. This must be a featureless area so that noise is the
only variation present. A dark gray sky is a good source, or a
badly out-of-focus area. To measure camera sensor noise, use a RAW
image. A JPEG image has already been processed inside the camera to
reduce noise. More information can be found in the <a href=
"#technical_notes">technical notes</a>.<br>
<br>
Here is a short technical description of each method:<br>
<table style=
"text-align: left; width: 668px; height: 138px; font-family: sans-serif;"
border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;Flatten<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Pixels are compared to the
mean and sigma of pixels within a radius.<br>
Those outside one sigma are moved slightly back toward the
mean.</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; white-space: nowrap;">
<small>&nbsp;Median</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Pixels are set to the
median value of their neighbors within a radius.</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Top Hat</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Detect outliers by
comparison with surrounding pixels at a distance.<br>
The distance is increased in steps from 1 pixel to the radius
limit.<br>
Outlyers are flattened slightly.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Wavelets</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>RGB brightness (with noise)
is converted into a series of wave functions that<br>
nearly sum to brightness and represent an approximation with less
noise.</small></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
The wavelets algorithm was adapted from code found in a Gimp
plug-in.<br>
The initial version was written by Dave Coffin for the program
Dcraw<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="smart_erase" id=
"smart_erase"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Smart Erase</span> (File View &gt;
Repair &gt; Smart Erase)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 307px; height: 162px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/smart-erase.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5" align=
"left"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
This function can be used to erase small objects that can spoil a
good photo, such as power lines, trash on the ground, a sign, etc.
The unwanted object is replaced with pixels taken from the
surrounding area. This is sometimes very effective (side-effects
almost invisible), and sometimes not. It works best for small or
narrow objects in the photo. <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Radius</span> controls the size of a
circle around the mouse pointer, defining the area to select and
erase. Drag the mouse to enclose all or part of the object to be
removed. Left-drag selects and right-drag un-selects. Press [Erase]
to erase the selected area, replacing the pixels with the nearest
pixels from outside the selection. If the selection was not precise
enough, use [Undo], adjust the selected area, and [Erase] again.
Repeated selections and erasures will accumulate until you use
[New_Area] to start a new selection. The prior erased areas are now
fixed and [Undo] will only work for the current selection. As with
all edit functions, the main menu buttons [Undo] and [Redo] can be
used to review all changes. It is likely best to work with an image
zoomed to 200% or more. The <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Blur</span> control adds blur to the
replacement pixels. This can reduce visible side-effects, since the
replacement pixels may be sharper or have more contrast than the
surroundings. Change the Blur setting and repeat the [Erase]
button. A blur of 0.5 or 1 pixel is usually effective. The [show]
and [hide] buttons can be used to show the outline of the current
selection or hide it to better judge the results after
erasing.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="redeye_remove" id=
"redeye_remove"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Red Eyes</span> (File View &gt;
Repair &gt; Red Eyes)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
This function reduces the red-eye effect from electronic flash
photos. Two methods are provided. The first is faster but may not
handle difficult cases. The second method is more robust but also
needs more time and care. To use the first function, left-click on
a red-eye one or more times until satisfied. If the darkened area
is too small or off-center, do a right-click to undo the change and
then left-click more precisely on the center of the red-eye. If a
red-eye cannot be fixed correctly, right-click to undo the change
and then use the second method. The second method can better handle
difficult cases where the red-eye is only slightly red and the
color difference with the eyelids is too little for the automatic
algorithm to distinguish. Place the cursor over the center of the
red eye. Hold the left mouse button and drag the cursor down and to
the right. A dotted ellipse will appear enclosing the red eye.
Repeat if needed to get the red eye centered in the ellipse
(roughly). Note that the shape of the ellipse depends on the
direction of the drag, which can allow more precise enclosure of
only the red-eye. Left-click inside the ellipse repeatedly while
watching the red eye darken, and stop when it is dark enough. If
you go too far, the eyelids may start to darken. Right-click to
undo and repeat if necessary.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="paint_clone" id=
"paint_clone"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Paint / Clone</span> (File View
&gt; Repair &gt; Paint/Clone)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 415px; height: 319px;" alt="" src=
"images/paint-clone.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
This function changes individual pixels by painting them with the
mouse.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
If a <a href="#select_area">select area</a> is enabled, the
painting is confined within the area.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Paint
Color</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
This button allows you to pick a color, and shows the current
color. You can also shift + left-click on the image to choose a
color from the image. The <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">paintbrush radius</span> control sets
a circle around the mouse pointer which shows the area being
painted or erased. Left drag on the image to paint with the current
color. Right drag over a previously painted area to erase
(gradually undo the painting). The <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">transparency</span> controls
determine how intensely the color is applied (or erased) at the
center and edges of the circle. Zero transparency applies the full
color immediately whereas a high transparency (90+) allows you to
gradually change the color using multiple drags (analogous to spray
painting from a distance). Erase also works this way: use zero
transparency to immediately erase, and high transparency to erase
gradually.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
NOTE: zoom the image to 100% or more when using a small brush. If
the mouse steps are larger than the image pixels and a small brush
is being used, some pixels may be skipped by the mouse and cannot
be painted.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Copy From Image</span>
(clone)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Instead of one fixed color for all pixels within the paintbrush
radius, pixels are taken from somewhere else in the image. Shift +
left click on the image to select the source area, then drag on the
area to paint. The source area is painted over the dragged area.
The transparency controls work as described above. This method can
be used to erase an unwanted object, replacing it with background
taken from elsewhere.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
The [undo-last] button reverses the last paint or erase operation,
and this can be repeated to remove many recent edits. Each new
mouse drag operation is a unit of work that can be separately
reversed. The memory for undo is limited, so this may stop working
after reversing several operations. [undo all] will put the image
back in its initial condition.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
If you de-select the <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">gradual paint</span> option, painting
and erasing will be sudden instead of gradual. If you are painting
within a <a href="#select_area">select area</a> with edge blending,
the painted changes will be zero at the edges and 100% for pixels
beyond the blend width from the edges. This works better if
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">gradual paint</span> is
not selected.<br>
<br>
If <span style="text-decoration: underline;">paint over transparent
areas</span> is selected, painting over transparent areas will
reduce or eliminate the transparency, depending on the mouse
transparency controls and the <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">gradual paint</span> setting. If this
option is not selected, image transparency is not changed, and
painted pixels keep their original transparency values (only the
opaque part of the image is painted).<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="paint_transp" id="paint_transp"></a>&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Paint Transparency</span> (File
View &gt; Repair &gt; Paint Transparency)<br>
&nbsp;<img style="width: 236px; height: 225px;" alt="" src=
"images/paint-transparency.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>
Paint transparent or semi-transparent areas on an image. Such areas
are useful in the Fotoxx Mashup function, where images or
background underneath a transparent area can show through. Other
image editors (e.g. Gimp) can also use transparent areas.<br>
<br>
The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">paintbrush
radius</span> control sets a circle around the mouse pointer which
shows the area being transformed. Left drag on the image to
increase the transparency, right drag to decrease. If <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">gradual paint</span> is checked, the
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">strength</span> controls
determine how rapidly the transparency changes at the center and
edges of the circle. If gradual paint is not checked, transparency
is set to 100% (left drag) or 0% (right drag) for the entire area
covered by the mouse circle.<br>
<br>
If a <a href="#select_area">Select Area</a> is active, only the
selected areas are affected.<br>
<br>
An image file having transparency information must be saved as a
TIF or PNG file. JPEG files do not support transparency.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="add_transparency" id="add_transparency"></a><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Add Transparency</span> (File View
&gt; Repair &gt; Add Transparency)<br>
<img style="width: 330px; height: 211px;" alt="" src=
"images/add-transparency.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>
Add transparency to an image based on brightness or a chosen color.
Areas of the image with greater brightness, or greater match with
the chosen color, will become more transparent. The reverse will
happen if <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Invert
Match</span> is checked. Click on the image to set the color to
match. You can match based on any combination of hue, saturation,
and lightness. <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Match
Level</span> selects the degree of match required for maximum
transparency. At the minimum setting (left end), the entire image
will be transparent. The <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Transparency</span> slider regulates
the amount of transparency applied (zero at the minimum setting).
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Threshold</span> sets a
match level below which the transparency is zero.<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="color_mode" id=
"color_mode"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Color Mode</span> (File View &gt;
Repair &gt; Color Mode)<br>
<img style="width: 188px; height: 229px;" alt="" src=
"images/color-mode.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
Use this function to make a black and white or color negative, or
convert a negative image into a positive image, or convert to sepia
coloring (a modified black and white conversion for an aged photo
effect).<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Select one of the four buttons:<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; &nbsp; black / white positive - convert a color image to
black and white<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; black / white negative - convert to black and
white and reverse brightness<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; color positive - do nothing at all, or undo one
of the others<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; color negative - replace each RGB color with its
compliment<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; sepia - convert to a modified black and white
for an aged photo effect<br>
<br>
The slider can be used to apply the effect incrementally, from 0%
(no change) to 100%.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Color negative: Each RGB color is replaced with the maximum value -
the color value. For example, if the RGB colors (% of maximum) are
20/40/60, then the negative color is 80/60/40. Doing this twice
brings back the original colors. This produces complimentary colors
as follows: red becomes cyan, green becomes magenta, and blue
becomes yellow.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="shift_colors" id=
"shift_colors"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Shift Colors</span> (File View
&gt; Repair &gt; Shift Colors)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 264px; height: 138px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/shift_colors.jpg" vspace="5" align=
"left"><br clear="all">
This function can be used to correct colors or convert an image
into false colors. Choose any of the three RGB colors and move the
slider left or right from the center. One of the two other colors
will be substituted in a graduated manner. For example, you can
gradually substitute green or blue for the color red. The
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">All</span> slider shifts
all colors together. Do this first to find a first optimum, then
shift the RGB colors individually.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="color_saturation" id="color_saturation"></a><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Color Saturation</span> (File View
&gt; Repair &gt; Color Saturation<br>
There is one slider control to adjust color intensity or saturation
from zero (black and white image) to 100%.<br>
Retouch Combo also includes an adjustment for color
intensity.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="adjust_RGB_CMY" id=
"adjust_RGB_CMY"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Adjust RGB / CMY</span> (File View
&gt; Repair &gt; Adjust RGB/CMY)<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 458px; height: 129px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/adjust-RGB.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
This function is used to change overall brightness and contrast, or
that of selected colors. The settings are retained within and
across Fotoxx sessions, so this function can be used to process
multiple photos made under the same lighting conditions and needing
the same (or nearly) adjustments. Use the [reset] button to restore
all inputs to neutral values.<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<table style=
"text-align: left; width: 631px; height: 101px; font-family: sans-serif;"
border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;Brightness</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Increase or decrease
overall image brightness<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>+Red -
Cyan&nbsp; etc.<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Increase or decrease
the brightness of one color<br>
&nbsp;and change complimentary color in the opposite
direction<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;Contrast<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Increase or decrease
the overall image contrast<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Red,
etc.<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Increase or decrease
the contrast of individual RGB colors<br></small></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;"><a name="adjust_HSL" id=
"adjust_HSL"></a></span><span style="font-weight: bold;">&nbsp;<br>
Adjust HSL</span> (File View &gt; Repair &gt; Adjust HSL)<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;"><img style=
"width: 357px; height: 287px;" alt="" src="images/adjust-HSL.jpg"
hspace="5" vspace="5"><br></span> Change a selected range of colors
in an image using an HSL color chooser (Hue, Saturation,
Lightness). This function can be used to fix color problems, e.g. a
false color cast in the entire image or in certain colors, or an
overexposed sky (too white). If you are not familiar with the HSL
color model, I suggest you read the Wikipedia article about
this.<br>
<br>
Begin by selecting a target <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">image color</span> to match and
adjust, using shift+click on the image. This color will be the
center of a range of colors that will be selected for adjustment.
This range can be very narrow or wide, depending on other dialog
settings. Select what color attributes will be matched using the
checkboxes for <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">hue</span>, <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">saturation</span>, and <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">lightness</span>. Each of these will
narrow the range of selected colors. If none are checked, all
colors are selected. <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Match Level</span> can be used to
further widen the range of selected colors. 100% means only closely
matching colors are changed.<br>
<br>
The Output Color controls are used to set the new output color
which will replace the selected input colors. The resulting color
will be a mix of the original color and the new color. The new
color part is determined by the <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Adjustment</span> slider which can be
set from 0 to 100%. Use the HSL checkboxes to determing which HSL
components of input color are replaced with the corresponding HSL
components of the output color. Use the sliders for output color
HSL to adjust the new color. The output color is shown in the
smaller box on the left, which is updated as you move the
sliders.<br>
<br>
Move the sliders and watch the live image updates to optimize the
result.<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;"><br>
Hint:</span> begin by matching on hue and saturation, and replacing
only hue - this means that the output color saturation and
lightness will be copied from the original image colors, and only
the hue will be replaced.<br>
<br>
This function (like most others) can be used with <a href=
"#select_area">Select Area</a> to restrict the change to selected
image areas.<br clear="all">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="ramp_brightness" id=
"ramp_brightness"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Ramp Brightness</span> (File View
&gt; Repair &gt; Ramp Brightness)<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 238px; height: 316px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/brightness-ramp.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"
align="left"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
This example shows brightening of the<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
upper right image quadrant.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
This function varies the brightness across an image, with the
direction and magnitude of the brightness slope determined by
editable curves. You can use this to compensate for uneven lighting
or vignetting (darker image corners). The function dialog displays
two editable curves, horizontal and vertical. The horizontal curve
adjusts brightness horizontally, and the vertical curve adjusts
brightness vertically. Move the curves in the directions labeled
"+" and "-" to increase or decrease the image brightness in the
corresponding image area. To remove vignetting in the image
corners, move both ends of both curves in the "+" direction while
fixing the middle areas or even moving them in the "-" direction.
To brighten the upper right corner, move the right end of the
horizontal curve and the upper end of the vertical curve in the "+"
direction, as in the example above.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
If used with <a href="#select_area">select area</a>, the scales
refer to the enclosing rectangle of the area instead of the whole
image. Thus you can select an area of an image and apply a
brightness ramp across the area. If the button <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">All</span> is selected (default) then
all colors are adjusted equally (i.e. brightness is adjusted). If
one of the colors is selected, the image is adjusted for that color
only, and the All curve is ignored. Any or all three RGB colors may
be adjusted in this manner. You can use this to remove a
color-caste that varies across an image or image area.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="ramp_color" id=
"ramp_color"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Ramp Color</span> (File View &gt;
Repair &gt; Ramp Color)<br>
<img style="width: 292px; height: 454px;" alt="" src=
"images/color_ramp.jpg" vspace="5" align="left"><br clear="all">
This function can be used to make complex color corrections,
whereby different parts of the image need different corrections.
Select up to 9 control points on the image by clicking them with
the mouse. The points are added to the list in the dialog window,
with the most recent point at the top. The points are labeled A-I
in the list and on the image window. The current RGB values are
shown (or EV or OD units if selected). Change the RGB / EV / OD
values in the dialog, and the image will be changed to match. Each
pixel in the image is influenced by all the control points in the
dialog, with the closer control points having more influence than
those farther away. The slider Blend determines how widely the
control points spread their influence. If delta is checked, the
values shown are the deltas (differences) from the original
image.<br>
<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="match_colors" id=
"match_colors"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Match Colors</span> (File View
&gt; Repair &gt; Match Colors)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 324px; height: 202px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/match-color.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5" align=
"left"><br>
<br clear="all">
This function matches the colors in one image to those in another.
A small spot, determined from a mouse click, is sampled from each
image. The spot on the 2nd image will be made to have the same
average color (RGB values) as the spot from the 1st image. The
factors used to make the RGB values the same are then applied to
all the pixels in the 2nd image. The most common use is to remove a
color-cast from an image by marking a spot on the image that should
have a given color which was taken from another image.&nbsp;<br>
<br>
Procedure: The dialog lists 5 steps to take in sequence. (1) Set a
radius for the spot sample. The mouse cursor will have a circle of
this radius which is the spot area that will be sampled. (2) Open
the 1st image (press the [open] button for a file open dialog). If
the current image is already the one you want, this step can be
skipped. (3) Click on the image to take a color sample from the
spot area enclosed by the mouse circle. You can change the radius
and click again if wanted. (4) Open the 2nd image by pressing the
[open] button. (5) Click on the image at the spot you want to match
the spot color from the 1st image. The image colors will change
within a second or two. You can change the radius and click on
another spot if wanted, and the colors will change accordingly.
Click the dialog [done] or [cancel] button to finish.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="color_profile" id=
"color_profile"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Color Profile</span> (File View
&gt; Repair &gt; Color Profile)<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
Use this function to change from the normal sRGB color profile to
some other RGB color profile. If you have images with Adobe RGB
color, you can change them to sRGB for display on a monitor using
sRGB (normally the case). You may need to install ICC color
profiles. In Ubuntu, the package names are <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">icc-profiles</span> and <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">icc-profiles-free</span>.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="remove_dust" id=
"remove_dust"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Remove Dust</span> (File View &gt;
Repair &gt; Remove Dust)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 277px; height: 147px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/remove-dust.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5" align=
"left"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
Images made from dusty scanned slides can have many small dark
spots - shadows of the dust on the slides. Historical photos from
the internet often have a similar problem. This function can be
used to remove the majority of such spots. Move the three sliders
until the maximum number of dust spots are painted red, then press
the [erase] button to erase them. Press [red] to bring back the red
view, then you can adjust the sliders again and press [erase]. The
"spot size limit" slider limits the size of the spots that will be
erased. The "max. brightness" slider sets a threshold for ignoring
spots that are not dark enough. The "min. contrast" slider screens
out spots having low contrast with their surroundings. This process
is usually a compromise. If the settings are not optimal, small
features like tree leaves can be erased, or large spots may be left
in place. Different parts of the image may need different settings,
e.g. sky can be treated more aggressively than a building wall. You
can simply use Erase Dust multiple times with different settings as
needed to get all the dust spots. Or you can use <a href=
"#select_area">select area</a> to process the image in sections. If
some spots are persistent, you can treat them manually with
<a href="#smart_erase">Smart Erase</a>: set a small mouse radius
and click on each spot to remove it. Spots from fibers (long and
thin) are usually not removed automatically, but Smart Erase can be
effective here.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="anti_alias" id=
"anti_alias"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Anti-Alias</span> (File View &gt;
Repair &gt; Anti-Alias)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 511px; height: 214px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/anti_alias.jpg" vspace="5"><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
This function can reduce pixelation (aka "jaggies" or "stair
steps") in a low-resolution image. Press the [apply] button to make
the change, then [done]. The result is sharper than using the Blur
function. It may be useful to apply sharpening afterwards.<br>
<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Note</span>: this tool is
only effective for pixelation with single-pixel "steps". If the
image has been resized larger (steps are larger than 1 pixel) the
algorithm does not work. It thinks the steps are legitimate because
they are big. Pixelation in photos normally occurs only when a
photo has been reduced and then enlarged. Pixelation is not a
problem with normal photography - lens blur is usually larger than
the pixel size.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="color_fringes" id=
"color_fringes"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Color Fringes</span> (File View
&gt; Repair &gt; Color Fringes)<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<img alt="" src="images/color_fringes.jpg" height="217" hspace="5"
vspace="5" width="664"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
This function is used to reduce chromatic abberation. Look
carefully at the left photo, taken from inside a church. It has
color fringes that were mostly eliminated in the processed image to
the right (these images are 400% size and not very sharp). Color
fringes can appear along high-contrast edges, especially in the
outer image areas where lens distortions are usually greatest. To
get rid of them, zoom the image to a maximum size and center on an
area with color fringes. Move the slider controls slowly while
watching the image, and leave them where the color fringes are
minimized. To speed up the response time, <a href=
"#select_area">select</a> a small area first, optimize the color
fringes in this area, then remove the area before pressing [done]
so that the entire image will get the final corrections. The
corrections are scaled so that the maximum correction is at the
image edges and the correction at the center is zero.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="stuck_pixels" id=
"stuck_pixels"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Stuck Pixels</span> (File View
&gt; Repair &gt; Stuck Pixels)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 281px; height: 160px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/stuck_pixels.jpg" vspace="5" align=
"left"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
Camera sensors may have defects causing isolated pixels to be
always bright or always dark. This may be one RGB color or all of
them. I have seen a case where a group of 3x3 pixels was always too
red. This function can find such pixels in an image and repair them
by substituting neighboring pixels.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Select the defect sizes to search for: 1 pixel, 4 pixels in a 2x2
block, or 9 pixels in a 3x3 block. The defects found are surrounded
by small circles which you can toggle between write, black and red.
Zoom-in to inspect these and determine if they are real defects.
Use the contrast control to precisely select the defects. If set
too low, small high-contrast spots in the image may be erroneously
selected. If set too high, real defects may be missed. Use the
[apply] button to erase the defects in the current image. You can
apply the function many times using different settings if
needed.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
The currently shown (encircled) defective pixels can be saved to a
file by using the [save] button. This file can be used later to fix
the defects in any image made by the same camera: use the [open]
button, select the saved defects file, then use the [apply] button
to fix the current image. Using a saved defects file from one image
to fix the defects in another image will only work if the two
images have never been trimmed, or if exactly the same trim was
applied to both images. This is necessary because the defective
pixels in the two images must have the same locations. If more than
one contrast setting or pixel group selection is needed to
accurately find all the defects in one image, you can save the
respective defect files and combine them manually into one file.
Use any text editor for this.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
I suggest you make a test images to find defects: Make a photo of a
paper sheet or blank wall that is underexposed to come out gray.
This image can be used to find both bright and dark stuck
pixels.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="warp_menu" id="warp_menu"></a>&nbsp;<br>
<img style="width: 40px; height: 40px;" alt="" src=
"images/warp.png" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<big><span style="font-weight: bold;">Warp Menu</span></big> (File
View &gt; Warp)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="unbend_image" id=
"unbend_image"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Unbend Image</span> (File View
&gt; Warp &gt; Unbend)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 495px; height: 509px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/unbend.jpg" vspace="5"><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
Panoramas of nearby subjects (typically buildings or interior
rooms) may show straight lines that are curved, or buildings that
are slanted. Warping of the images was necessary in the panorama
process in order for the images to fit together. The Unbend
function can be used afterwards to straighten the panorama image if
needed. Vertical and horizontal dotted lines are drawn over the
image, showing the unbend axes. Click or drag the mouse near the
end of a line to move it. If values in the four input controls are
changed, the image is warped in the manner indicated by the
corresponding four icons. Increase or decrease the values and
repeat until satisfied. Move the axes to change the centers of
warping.<br>
<br>
See also <a href="#warp_image">Warp Image</a> for another method of
correcting image curving and perspective.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="fix_perspective" id=
"fix_perspective"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Fix Perspective</span> (File View
&gt; Warp &gt; Fix Perspective)<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 363px; height: 267px;" alt="" src=
"images/fix-perspective2.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><img style=
"width: 348px; height: 108px;" alt="" src=
"images/fix-perspective.jpg" hspace="10" vspace="5"><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
This function can be used to straighten a photo made from an offset
angle. The image on the left is the original photo, taken from
right of center to aviud reflections. The image on the right is the
straightened version. This function can also be used to straighten
a building photographed from below or from the side.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Click on the four corners of the tetragon shape that you want to
make into a rectangle (in the above case, the four corners of the
painting or frame), then select [Apply]. Use [Reset] to go back and
try again if needed. The clicked corners are marked with tiny
squares enclosing small letters A, B, C, D. The upper left corner
of the tiny square precisely marks the image position. Clicking
near a marked corner will move it to the new position. After the
4th corner is marked, a new click replaces the closest mark. The
[Trim] button will automatically trim the image at the selected
corners. The trim and straighten can be undone in sequence. You can
use the keyboard arrow keys to move the corner markers in 1-pixel
steps. The arrow keys work on the last corner clicked or
moved.<br clear="all">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="warp_image" id=
"warp_image"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Warp Image</span>
(distort)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 612px; height: 372px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/warps.jpg" vspace="5"><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="warp_area" id=
"warp_area"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Warp area</span> (File View &gt;
Warp &gt; Warp area)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
This function can be used to make distortions within an image. You
can select an image area and drag the mouse to stretch this area
with respect to the rest of the image. The image is like rubber. If
the mouse drag begins within the selected area, then the area is
warped within its current boundaries - the movement is maximum at
the mouse pointer and declines to zero at the edges of the selected
area. If the mouse drag begins outside the selected area, the area
edges near the mouse can be pulled out beyond the original area
boundary. Many mouse drags of different lengths and directions can
be combined to achieve the desired results. When finished, you can
select another area and do some more warping, or select [done] to
exit the function. The method used limits loss of resolution from
repeated warps: for each warp step, the total movement of each
pixel is accumulated and the original image is warped to the latest
pixel positions. The pixels are interpolated to reduce jaggies and
improve sharpness.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="unwarp_closeup"></a><br>
<b>Unwarp Closeup</b> (File View &gt; Warp &gt; Unwarp Closeup)<br>
<img alt="" src="images/unwarp-closeup.jpg" height="174" hspace="5"
vspace="5" width="516"><br>
Closeup face photos are often distorted, because areas closer to
the camera are larger in the photo than areas farther away. This
function can be used to reverse the distortion. Use <a href=
"#select_area">Select Area</a> to select the face first (does not
need to be accurate). Click the image on the nose. Move the slider
to optimize. If the face is turned away from the camera, the nose
might not be the best center for unwarping. Experiment with other
places.<br clear="all">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="warp_curved" id=
"warp_curved"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Warp curved</span> (File View &gt;
Warp &gt; Warp curved)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
This function is useful to correct perspective problems (see also
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href=
"#unbend_image">Unbend</a>). Drag the image from any position,
using the mouse. The entire image will be pulled or pushed in the
direction of the mouse, but areas near the mouse are moved more
than more distant areas. You can straighten curved lines or
deliberately curve the image. The control <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">warp span</span> determines the
radius of warping around the mouse. 1.0 means the full image is
warped, and smaller values confine the warp to smaller areas around
the mouse.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="warp_linear" id=
"warp_linear"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Warp linear</span> (File View &gt;
Warp &gt; Warp linear)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
This function is useful to correct perspective problems (see also
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href=
"#unbend_image">Unbend</a>). Drag the image from any position,
using the mouse. This function works over a broader area than the
curved warp and causes less image curvature. To minimize the
addition of curvature, pull only on the image corners.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="warp_affine" id=
"warp_affine"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Warp affine</span> (File View &gt;
Warp &gt; Warp affine)<br>
This function can be used to warp an image in interesting ways.
Drag the image from a corner or edge using the mouse. The changes
are purely linear so straight lines remain straight. This transform
is called "affine". Technical details can be found with
Google.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="flatten_book" id=
"flatten_book"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Flatten Book
Page&nbsp;</span>(File View &gt; Warp &gt; Flatten Book
Page)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 552px; height: 476px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/flatbook.jpg" vspace="5" align="left"><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
This function can flatten a photographed page from a book. If the
book is thick, the pages bend downward at the binding, and the
photographed text is squeezed together. This function straightens
the the page and unsqueezes the text.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Photo
Procedure</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
First, make the photo as good as possible to minimize the needed
corrections. The page curvature can be reduced by holding the book
half-opened. Place the camera over the center of the page, so that
the top and bottom edge curves look roughly equal. Use lots of
illumination to increase the depth of field, to insure the
curved-down part of the page remains in sharp focus. Two persons
working together can photograph 1-2 pages per minute.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Fotoxx
Procedure</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
First, trim the image, keeping all of the page but little more.
Rotate the page if needed. Use <a href="#fix_perspective">Fix
Perspective</a> to make the page more rectangular if needed. Start
the Flatten function. Click the mouse along the top edge, creating
visible marker dots at the clicked points. After 4+ points are
available, a curved line is drawn through the points. Add more
points and drag the points as needed to make the line conform
closely to the page edge. Repeat for the bottom edge. Press
[flatten] to flatten the page. The edges should now be straight (or
straight enough). The text near the binding is still squeezed
together. Unsqueeze the text by pulling the <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">top</span> and <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">bottom</span> sliders. The text is
spread out in a way that is proportional the the slope of the top
and bottom page edges, so the area near the binding is stretched
the most. The [undo] button restores the unmodified image and the
marker dots, which can now be adjusted.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="sphere" id="sphere"></a><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Spherical Projection</span> (File
View &gt; Warp &gt; Spherical Projection)<br>
<img style="width: 467px; height: 250px;" alt="" src=
"images/sphere2.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5">&nbsp;<img style=
"width: 226px; height: 117px;" alt="" src="images/sphere.jpg"
hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>
Make a spherical projection of an image. Drag the mouse on the
image to change the center of the projection (defaults to
midpoint). The <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">flatten</span> control modifies the
projection gradually from a sphere (left) to a flat image (right).
The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">magnify</span>
control magnifies the resulting image up to 2x. If you want the
margins to be transparent, be sure to save the file as .png instead
of .jpg (JPEG files do not support transparency).<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="selective_rescale" id="selective_rescale"></a><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Selective Rescale</span> (File
View &gt; Warp &gt; Selective Rescale)<br>
<img style="width: 507px; height: 173px;" alt="" src=
"images/selective-rescale2.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5" align=
"left"><br>
<br>
<img style="width: 236px; height: 128px;" alt="" src=
"images/selective-rescale.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br clear=
"all">
This function rescales an image to a smaller size, leaving selected
areas unchanged. The goal is to increase the relative size of the
area of interest. The image above was reduced, but the boat in the
foreground was left unchanged. Image reduction may be in width or
height or both. First, select the areas that are to be preserved
using <a href="#select_area">Select Area</a>. Press the [proceed]
button. The selected area is erased and the mouse cursor changes
into a drag cursor. Pull the image inward from the <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">upper left corner</span>. This
operation may be repeated as needed until you are satisfied. Press
the [done] button. This function works best when the selected
area(s) are small in comparison to the entire image. The pixel rows
and columns that intersect the selected areas are not changed.
Other areas are compressed as the image is pulled inward.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="make_waves" id=
"make_waves"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Make Waves</span> (File View &gt;
Effects &gt; Make Waves)<br>
<img style="width: 468px; height: 310px;" alt="" src=
"images/make-waves.jpg"
vspace="5"><br style="font-weight: bold; font-family: sans-serif;">
This function distorts an image into a wave pattern, as if it were
being viewed through turbulent water. The dialog allows you to
change the mean horizontal and vertical wavelengh, amplitude and
variance. The "perspective" input allows the wavelengths to
gradually lengthen from top to bottom. Like most effects, this
function also works within a seleced area.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a name="effects_menu" id="effects_menu"></a>&nbsp;<br>
<img style="width: 40px; height: 40px;" alt="" src=
"images/effects.png" vspace="5"><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<big><span style="font-weight: bold;">Effects Menu</span></big>
(File View &gt; Effects)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="color_depth" id=
"color_depth"></a><span style=
"font-weight: bold;">&nbsp;&nbsp;</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif; font-weight: bold;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Color Depth</span> (File View &gt;
Effects &gt; Color Depth)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
This function changes the normal 16 bits per RGB color (red, green,
blue) to any value between 1 and 16 bits per color. At 8 bits per
color, there are 16.8 million total color combinations. At 4 bits
per color there are only 4096 total colors. Use 1-4 bits for an
interesting "poster" effect.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="pencil_sketch" id=
"pencil_sketch"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Pencil Sketch</span> (File View
&gt; Effects &gt; Sketch)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 702px; height: 251px;" alt="" src=
"images/sketch.jpg" vspace="5"><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
This function transforms a photo into something like a pencil
sketch. Dark pixels are aggregated into fewer pixels, leaving
vacated areas brighter. <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Contrast</span> can also be used as a
proxy for dark pixels. <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Threshold</span> can be used to
filter the input image by brightness. <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Clip Level</span> is used to filter
the output to further reduce isolated or marginally dark pixels.
Choose colors for foreground and background. Two algorithms are
provided. Results may look more interesting with one or the other.
Reducing the size of the input image may also give more interesting
results.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="cartoon" id="cartoon"></a><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Cartoon</span> (File View &gt;
Effects &gt; Cartoon)<br>
<img style="width: 446px; height: 230px;" alt="" src=
"images/cartoon.jpg" vspace="5"><br clear="all">
Transform a photo into a cartoon-like drawing. Black lines are
drawn over the "edges" of objects in the image, wherever the
brightness or color changes abruptly. <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Line Threshold</span> sets the
sensitivity for edge detection and line drawing, causing more lines
(lower threshold) or fewer lines to be drawn. <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Line Width</span> makes the lines
thicker or thinner. <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Blur
Radius</span> controls a blur function which can make the lines
look more curvy or less jagged. <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Kuwahara Depth</span> controls a
sharpen function which can strengthen the image edges.<br>
<br>
This function can be quite slow to react if the image is large and
if the blur and kuwahara controls are set to high values (10+
seconds to respond). It works faster and better on smaller images,
around 2 megapixels or less. I suggest you start with small values
(2-3) for kuwahara and blur, then adjust line threshold to optimize
the density of the drawn lines. Now change kuwahara and blur in
small steps and re-adjust line threshold. If you are working with a
large image, I suggest you <a href="#select_area">select</a> a
small but important area within the image so that optimization can
proceed faster. Then delete the area and do the entire image. You
may be close to optimum already.<br>
<br>
Other edit functions, applied before or after Cartoon, may enhance
the effect. These include color saturation, tone mapping, color
depth, texture, and warp curved. Paint/Clone is useful to remove
minor flaws manually. Shadows in the image are a particular
problem, since they cause lines to be drawn where normally not
wanted.<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="line_drawing" id=
"line_drawing"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Line Drawing</span> (File View
&gt; Effects &gt; Line Drawing)<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 697px; height: 240px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/line_drawing.jpg" vspace="5"><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
This function transforms a photo into a line drawing showing
outlines of objects within the image. Edges (sharp transitions in
brightness or color) in the image are brightened, and the rest of
the image is darkened.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
There are three sliding controls. T<span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">hreshold</span>: how bright an edge
must be in order to get enhanced, from "show no edges" at the low
end to "show all edges" (even faint ones) at the high end.
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Width</span>: width of
the enhanced edges, from 1-pixel to about 5 pixels. <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Brightness</span>: brightness of the
image itself, from dark (show only the outlines) to full
brightness. The <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">black/white</span> checkbox converts
the image from color to black and white, and the <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">negative</span> checkbox makes a
negative image (colors are replaced with their compliments).<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="color_drawing" id="color_drawing"></a>&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Color Drawing</span> (File View
&gt; Effects &gt; Color Drawing)<br clear="all">
<img style="width: 545px; height: 339px;" alt="" src=
"images/color-drawing.jpg" vspace="5"><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
This function transforms a photo into a solid color image that
looks like an illustration. The <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Threshold</span> slider separates the
image into brighter and darker areas, with the boundary set at a
brightness level determined by the slider. The other two sliders
regulate the brightness of these two areas. At the settings shown
here (Dark Areas pushed left, Bright Areas pushed right), the
darker areas are black and the brighter areas as as bright as
possible with intense coloration. If the sliders are moved to the
opposite sides, the original image is restored. Move the sliders
until the image is optimized.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
This function can be used to clean up a smudgy blackboard or
whiteboard image by separating the writing cleanly from the
background (if the background smudges are weaker than the writing).
It may help to apply Sharpen to the image beforehand, to increase
the contrast of the writing. Use the unsharp mask method with a
large radius.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="graduated_blur" id=
"graduated_blur"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Graduated Blur</span> (File View
&gt; Effects &gt; Graduated Blur)<br>
<img style="width: 200px; height: 119px;" alt="" src=
"images/graduated-blur.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 510px; height: 258px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/graduated-blur2.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"
align="left"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
This is another function to blur an image, but it works
differently. In the dialog, you specify a <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">contrast limit</span> and a
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">blur radius</span>. Only
pixels with less contrast than the given limit are blurred, and the
blur radius ranges from 1 to the given value for pixels with a
corresponding contrast ranging from the given limit to zero. In
short: low contrast pixels are blurred more than high contrast
pixels. This can be used, for example, to smooth skin tones without
blurring hair or reducing the sparkel in the eyes. Taken to
extremes, it produces a "cartoon" effect, especially when used in
combination with other retouch and effects functions.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="embossing" id=
"embossing"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Embossing</span> (File View &gt;
Effects &gt; Embossing)<br>
<img style="width: 377px; height: 82px;" alt="" src=
"images/embossing.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>
<img style="width: 354px; height: 310px;" alt="" src=
"images/embossing2.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5" align=
"left"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br clear="all">
This function transforms a photo into a simulated relief or
embossed image. The <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">radius</span> setting determines the
feature size or level of detail. The <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">depth</span> setting determines how
deep the features go into the surface. The upper 60% of this image
was embossed.<br clear="all">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="tiles" id=
"tiles"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Tiles</span> (File View &gt;
Effects &gt; Tiles)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
This function transforms a photo into an array of large monocolor
tiles. You can control the tile size and the thickness of the gap
between tiles. This is also called "pixelate" or "pixelize". Use
<a href="#select_area">Select Area</a> to confine the transform to
a limited area, such as a face.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="dot_matrix" id=
"dot_matrix"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Dots</span> (File View &gt;
Effects &gt; Dots)<br>
<img style="width: 241px; height: 93px;" alt="" src=
"images/dots.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 308px; height: 235px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/dots2.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5" align=
"left"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br clear="all">
This function transforms a photo into a array of dots, like a comic
book picture or Roy Lichtenstein painting. The only control is
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">dot size</span>. Also
experiment with using color saturation, color depth, or other
functions before and after using Dots.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="painting" id=
"painting"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Painting</span> (File View &gt;
Effects &gt; Painting)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
This function transform a photo into something looking more like a
painting. It reduces the number of colors, maps each contiguous
pixel area having the same color, and then consolidates smaller
areas into adjacent larger areas having the best color
match.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">color depth</span> sets
the number of colors to use: 1 = 8 colors, 2 = 64 colors ... 5 =
32768 colors.<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">patch area goal</span>
sets a lower limit for areas that will have their own color: areas
smaller than this number of pixels will be absorbed into an
adjacent area with the nearest color match.<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">req. color match</span>
sets the minimum color match required for a smaller area to be
consolidated into an adjacent larger area: 0 = don't care (maximum
consolidation), 100 = perfect match required (no
consolidation).<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">borders</span> determines
whether the colored areas will be delineated with a thin black
border, like irregular tiles in a mosaic. After using this
function, using the Embossing function can add interesting texture
to the image.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="vignette" id=
"vignette"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Vignette</span> (File View &gt;
Effects &gt; Vignette)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
This function is used to correct the&nbsp;darkening sometimes seen
around a photo's periphery, because less light reaches the edges
compared to the center.It can also be used to highlight or colorize
an object or area within an image.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 582px; height: 285px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/vignette.jpg"><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Click or drag the mouse on the image to change the vignette center,
which is initially at the center of the image.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Select <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Brightness</span>
to change the brightness of the image in a radial pattern: Adjust
the left or right end of the curve to change the brightness of the
center and edges of the image respectively. You can give a dark
surround to a portrait face, or you can fix an image with darkened
corners. The curve middle level corresponds to no change. Use lower
values to darken and higher values to brighten. The example above
gradually darkens the periphery of the image while leaving a broad
central area unchanged.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Select <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Color</span> to
add a chosen color to the image in a radial pattern. Curve values
of zero represent no change, and higher values add the chosen color
to the image. The highest value corresponds to 100% color. Use this
function to add a color surround to an image, e.g. surround a face
with a gradually increasing color.<br>
<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Irregular Vignette</span><br>
<img style="width: 230px; height: 186px;" alt="" src=
"images/vignette2.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5" align="left">You can
make a vignette with arbitrary shape as follows:<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;+ <a href="#select_area">Select Area</a> - select the image
area to remain visible<br>
&nbsp;+ <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Invert</span> the
area to select the areas outside the image<br>
&nbsp;+ Set a <span style="text-decoration: underline;">blend
width</span> value for the edge fade-out width<br>
&nbsp;+ Keep the Select Area dialog active<br>
&nbsp;+ <a href="#paint_clone">Paint/Clone</a> - paint the outside
areas with the desired color<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; (the image edges will fade-out over
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">blend width</span>
pixels)<br>
&nbsp;+ Adjust the blend width value and paint again until
satisfied<br clear="all">
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="texture" id=
"texture"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Texture</span> (File View &gt;
Effects &gt; Texture)<br>
<img style="width: 183px; height: 145px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/texture.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5" align="left">
<img style="width: 485px; height: 180px;" alt="" src=
"images/texture2.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>
This function adds a textured surface to an image or <a style=
"font-family: sans-serif;" href="#select_area">selected areas</a>
within an image. Radius determines the texture pattern size.
Strength determines the intensity of the pattern, from almost
invisible to dominant.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear=
"all">
&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="pattern" id=
"pattern"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Pattern</span> (File View &gt;
Effects &gt; Pattern)<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;"><img style=
"width: 364px; height: 279px;" alt="" src="images/pattern2.jpg"
hspace="5" vspace="5"><img style="width: 364px; height: 206px;"
alt="" src="images/pattern1.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br style=
"font-weight: bold; font-family: sans-serif;"></span> Add a
background pattern to an image. A small image file (pattern file)
is used to cover the current image by duplicating the file, like a
tiled wall. This file can be a real pattern (e.g. an image of
canvas cloth, a brick wall, a repeating geometry ...), or any other
kind of image. The pattern is made semi-transparent, so that the
base image appears to be printed over the pattern, or the pattern
over the image. Many pattern files can be found using a Google
search for "pattern image". Download some of these and trim them if
needed to a size around 200-500 pixels. For convenience, add these
to the supplied pattern files in <span style=
"font-family: Liberation Mono;">/home/&lt;user&gt;/.fotoxx/patterns</span>.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Use the [Browse] button to select a pattern file. The selected
pattern will be tiled to cover the base image. The pattern is
partly transparent so that the base image shows through. Use
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Zoom</span> to grow or
shrink the pattern size. There are two methods to mix the pattern
with the base image. The pattern <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">opacity</span> can be set 0-100%. The
base image is used to fill the unused opacity - e.g. if the opacity
is set to 30%, then the final image will be 30% pattern and 70%
base image. <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Contrast</span> is used to modify the
base image brightness using the pattern brightness as a template.
The two parameters can both be used and mixed in any
ratio.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Width</span> and
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Height</span> are
initially set to the size of the pattern file. You can adjust these
smaller, which will cause less of the pattern to be used for
duplication. If the pattern file contains an image that repeats at
fixed intervals both horizontally and vertically, the [Calculate]
button can be used to set width and height to match. The result
will be a continuous pattern without any edge effects.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
If the pattern is irregular and edge effects appear where the
duplicated patterns are joined, you may be able to improve this.
Use <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Width</span> and
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Height</span> to revise
which part of the pattern image is used. The two <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Overlap</span> values determine how
much the duplicated patterns overlap at the edges, horizontally and
vertically. Add some overlap to mask edge effects.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#select_area">Select
Area</a> can be used to apply a pattern to part of an image, or
different patterns to different parts. After applying a pattern to
an image, it might be interesting to use <a style=
"font-family: sans-serif;" href="#embossing">Embossing</a> or
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href="#tone_mapping">Tone
Mapping</a> to add a 3-D effect to the pattern.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Useful pattern files in LibreOffice: <a style=
"font-family: sans-serif;" href=
"../../../../../usr/lib/libreoffice/share/gallery/www-back">/usr/lib/libreoffice/share/gallery/www-back</a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="mosaic" id=
"mosaic"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Mosaic</span> (File View &gt;
Effects &gt; Mosaic)<br style=
"font-weight: bold; font-family: sans-serif;">
Create a mosaic image using tiles made from all your
images.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 307px; height: 140px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/mosaic.jpg" vspace="5"><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 671px; height: 277px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/mosaic2.jpg" vspace="5"><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
Specify the tile size in pixels (e.g. 36 x 24) and press [Tiles].
Tiles will be created from all of your images (actually the
thumbnail images are used since their small size makes the process
run much faster). This may take some time (speed is over 10K images
/ min. on a strong PC). If you change the tile dimensions, press
[Tiles] again to regenerate the tiles. This may work much faster
since the images have been cached in memory by the OS. The
generated tiles are saved to a file and loaded again the next time
the Mosaic function is used. Regenerate the tiles only when new
images have been added to your collection or if you change the tile
size.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
After the tiles are created, press [Image] to convert the current
image into a mosaic using these tiles. This takes only a few
seconds. You can process additional images without regenerating the
tiles. Tiles are chosen by matching the average tile color to the
average image color at the tile position. If thousands of images
are available and if the range of colors is good enough, the mosaic
will turn out quite good. Use the mouse wheel (or CTRL+left click)
to zoom-in on any part of the image to see the tile
images.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Tile blending</span>
slider will cause the image to be blended with the tiles, making it
look better if the tiles are a bad color match. If the blending is
less than about 50%, the tiles remain almost as clear as before
(the eye compensates the false tint).<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
After a mosaic is created, you can click on any tile to get a
larger popup image. This is the full image for the tile, so you can
drag the window as large as you like and it will remain sharp. A
mosaic image can be saved like any other edited image, but if a
saved mosaic is opened, clicking the tiles for a bigger image will
not work. Regenerating the mosaic is quite fast, so do this if you
want the popups to work.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="custom_kernel" id="custom_kernel"></a>&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Custom Kernel</span> (File View
&gt; Effects &gt; Custom Kernel)<br>
<img style="width: 264px; height: 271px;" alt="" src=
"images/custom-kernel.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5" align="left"><br>
Apply a custom convolution kernel to an image (a small matrix
useful for blurring, sharpening, embossing, edge-detection, and
more). The underlying technology is explained in <a href=
"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kernel_%28image_processing%29">Wikipedia</a>.
Input a <span style="text-decoration: underline;">kernel
size</span>, a <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">divisor</span>, and fill-in the table
values. The values can be saved into a file and retrieved later by
using the [Load] and [Save] buttons. [Reset] restores the original
status. [Apply] applies the kernel to the image, and can be
repeated for multiple applications.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="directed_blur" id="directed_blur"></a><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Directed Blur</span> (File View
&gt; Effects &gt; Directed Blur)<br>
<img style="width: 190px; height: 160px;" alt="" src=
"images/directed-blur.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>
Pull a location on the image using the mouse. The area around the
mouse will move with the mouse and become blurred in this
direction, a "1-dimensional" blur. <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Blur span</span> can be used to
broaden or narrow the size of the area being blurred. <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Intensity</span> determines the
strength of the blur, from barely visible to completely
blurred.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="blur_background" id="blur_background"></a><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Blur Background (Bokeh)</span>
(File View &gt; Effects &gt; Tilt-Shift)<br>
<img style="width: 273px; height: 163px;" alt="" src=
"images/blur_background.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5" align=
"left"><img style="width: 266px; height: 163px;" alt="" src=
"images/blur_background2.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>
Blur the background image while leaving the foreground sharp. The
foreground is defined by using <a href="#select_area">Select
Area</a> to select one or more areas that are to remain sharp. If
there is no selected area to begin with, the select area dialog is
started automatically. After selecting the foreground areas, invert
the selection so that the background is now selected (use the
[invert] button in the Select Area dialog). This area is the one
that will be blurred. There are two blur methods available:
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Constant blur</span> uses
a constant blur radius for all areas blurred. <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Increase blur with distance</span>
uses the minimum blur radius for pixels adjacent to the foreground
(i.e. on the edge of the background area), and the maximum blur
radius for pixels at the maximum distance away from the foreground.
This requires that the edge-distance for all background pixels be
calculated, which can take considerable time for a large image.
This is done automatically if required. Various settings for blur
radius can then be tried without recalculating the edge
distances.<br>
<br>
<a href=
"https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tilt%E2%80%93shift_photography"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">
Tilt-Shift Effect</span></a>: You can do this by selecting a
horizontal rectangular area to remain sharp.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="combine_menu" id="combine_menu"></a> &nbsp;<br>
<img style="width: 40px; height: 40px;" alt="" src=
"images/combine.png" vspace="5"><br>
<big><span style="font-weight: bold;">Combine Menu</span></big>
(File View &gt; Combine)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="HDR" id=
"HDR"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">High Dynamic Range</span> (File
View &gt; Combine &gt; High Dynamic Range) (HDR) &nbsp;<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
Combine (overlay) multiple images of the same subject with
different exposure levels. The combined image can show improved
visibility of detail in both the darker and brighter areas, in
effect using pixels from the brighter images for the darker areas,
and from the darker images for the brighter areas. Many digital
cameras do exposure bracketing: take multiple shots in quick
succession with different exposure levels. You can combine such
images to make a better one. If the camera is adjusted manually
between shots, take care to keep it level and aim at the same
distant point. Some misalignment of the input images can be
tolerated. If things move between shots, ghosting cannot be
avoided.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 321px; height: 307px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/HDR-adjust.jpg" hspace="8" vspace="5" align=
"left">Select the HDR menu function and select up to 9 images,
which must all have nearly the same pixel dimensions. The images
are aligned and combined automatically. This needs 10 seconds to a
minute or more per image, depending on image size and CPU speed.
When done, the combined image is shown, along with a dialog for
manual adjustments. The contributions from the input images are
hown as a series of editable curves. The horizontal scale
represents pixel brightness, from dark to bright. Each curve
represents an image which contributes to the pixels. The image
contribution at a given brightness level is proportional to the
height of its curve at that level. The initial curve for the
brightest image will be high on the left and low on the right,
meaning a high contribution to dark pixels and a low contribution
to bright pixels. The darkest image will be low on the left and
high on the right, and the remaining images will be in-between. The
curves can be edited by dragging them with the mouse. The
corresponding image contributions are changed accordingly, and you
can see the results in quasi-real-time in the output image. In
general, the brightest image should have a higher contribution to
the darker pixels, and the darkest image a higher contribution to
the brighter pixels. You will likely need practice to become
effective at working the curves. A faster and easier alternative
may work as well: after the images are combined, ignore the curves
and exit from HDR. Use various edit functions to refine the image:
Brightness Distribution, Retouch Combo, and Tone Mapping. Select
Area can be used to enclose any area in the image which needs more
brightness, color, or local contrast, so you can apply different
methods and parameters to different areas.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="HDF" id=
"HDF"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">High Depth of Field</span> (File
View &gt; Combine &gt; High Depth of Field) (HDF)<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
Combine (overlay) multiple photos of the same subject with
different focus settings from close to distant. Different parts of
the subject are in sharp focus in each image. Combine the images so
that all parts of the subject are sharp. This technique is most
useful for extreme close-ups.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Making the photos: choose a point for the center of the image. Aim
the camera at a near object and depress the shutter button 1/2 way
to set the focus on this object. Hold the button at the 1/2
position, aim the camera at the chosen center, and snap the photo.
Now choose a farther object and do the same. Repeat with increasing
focus distance. Hopefully each part of the subject is sharp in at
least one photo. The camera position should be very nearly the same
for all photos, which can be a challenge when the subject is very
close. Camera movement can cause scaling and parallax problems
(close objects shifted against distant objects). Such problems may
be fixable later in Fotoxx, but this may require considerable time.
It is better to avoid the problems.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<img style="width: 232px; height: 170px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/HDF-paint.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5" align=
"left">Processing the photos: in Fotoxx, choose the HDF menu
function and select up to 9 images. The images will now be aligned
as well as possible. This needs 10 seconds to a minute or more per
image, depending on image size and CPU speed. The output image is
an even mix of the aligned input images. A small amount of camera
movement between the photos is compensated, but this is limited,
and parallax shifts are not compensated at all. When the alignment
is complete, a dialog opens. You can select any input image and
"paint" with the mouse on any area of the output image. This
converts the original image mix to the single selected image for
the area being painted. For each area or object in the image,
choose an input image that is sharp in that area. The <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">radius</span> of the paintbrush can
set larger or smaller, so you can paint large areas quickly and
control fine detail when needed. If you have overlapping near and
far objects, time and patience will be needed to make all of them
sharp. Misalignments can be corrected by selecting the <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">warp</span> option in the dialog. The
underlying images can then be dragged and warped with the mouse,
and the composite output image is changed accordingly. The warp is
limited to the area around the mouse. When a painted area is
dragged, the corresponding image is automatically selected and
dragged, while areas painted with other images remain fixed. Areas
that have not been painted cannot be dragged. Move around to
different areas and make incremental drags until all areas are
aligned.&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Suggested
Workflow</span>: Using <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">paint</span> mode, choose each image
in sequence and paint all areas that look sharp in that image. Any
boundaries that are not well-aligned will show up clearly as shifts
in the edges of objects in the image. Some of these can be made
unimportant by changing the image used for painting (if more than
one image is sharp enough). Using <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">warp</span> mode, make fine
adjustments as needed to eliminate visible shifts.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="stack_paint" id=
"stack_paint"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Stack / Paint</span> (File View
&gt; Combine &gt; Stack/Paint)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 259px; height: 136px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/stack-paint.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5" align=
"left">Combine (overlay) multiple photos of the same subject taken
at different times. Remove tourists and cars that come and go
between shots by painting them away with the mouse.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Making the photos</span>:
Aim the camera at the same distant point and take multiple photos
as tourists or cars move in front of the subject. Try to get at
least one photo with each part of the subject not obscured by the
moving objects.<br clear="all">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Processing the
photos</span>: In Fotoxx, choose the Stack / Paint menu function
and select up to 9 images. The images will now be aligned as well
as possible. This needs 10 seconds to a minute or more per image,
depending on image size and CPU speed. The output image is an even
mix of the aligned input images. When the alignment is complete, a
dialog opens. You can select any input image and "paint" with the
mouse on any area of the output image. This converts the original
image mix to the single selected image for the area being painted.
For each area in the image, choose an input image that is free from
the moving objects. The <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">radius</span> of the paintbrush can
set larger or smaller, so you can paint large areas quickly and
control fine detail when needed.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="stack_noise" id=
"stack_noise"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Stack / Noise</span> (File View
&gt; Combine &gt; Stack/Noise)<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;"><img style=
"width: 289px; height: 143px;" alt="" src="images/stack-noise.jpg"
vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"></span> This
function combines 2-9 images (photos) of the same subject. The
photos should be nearly the same, except for small offsets caused
by a hand-held camera. If the photos were made with a very high ISO
setting (low light conditions), the pixels will have considerable
noise. By making many photos and averaging them, the noise can be
mostly eliminated.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Making the photos</span>:
Choose a point for the center of the image. Take several photos
using the same center and being careful not to shift or rotate the
camera too much. The more photos the better. Up to nine can be used
with Fotoxx, but you can take more in order to have some to discard
if they are not sharp, a common problem with low light conditions
and long exposure times.<br clear="all">
&nbsp;<br>
In Fotoxx, chose the Stack / Noise function and select up to nine
images. They will be combined automatically and shown, and then a
dialog will open. The initial output image is a combination of all
the selected input images, averaged together. This means that the
RGB values for each output pixel are the average of the RGB values
for the corresponding input pixels. A few alternative tools can be
used to possibly reduce the remaining noise a little more. The
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">use median</span> button
will change the output pixels from an average of the input pixels
to the median of the input pixels (1-3 middle RGB values are
averaged, depending on the number of images). This may or may not
be better, so switch back and forth to compare (the screen update
may need several seconds). The checkboxes for <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">omit low pixel</span> and
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">omit high pixel</span>
will cause the lowest and highest RGB input values to be discarded
before the average is calculated. This may help to get noise spikes
removed from the mix. This has no effect if the median method is
selected.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="panorama" id=
"panorama"></a>&nbsp;&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Panorama Image</span> (File View
&gt; Combine &gt; Panorama)<br>
<img style="width: 855px; height: 325px;" alt="" src=
"images/panorama.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>
This function stitches 2-4 images together to make a wide-angle
image or panorama. The images must overlap by 15% or more, so that
the program can find where they match and join them together. Start
by selecting 2-4 image files. The images are initially joined and
shown with a small transparent overlap. A pre-align dialog (above)
asks you to drag the images into rough alignment. Drag the images
into the correct left to right order. The image to drag may overlap
other images. To be clear about which image is being dragged, drag
from near the center of the image. After the images are in the
correct order, align each image to its left neighbor. It works best
to proceed from left to right. Move an image horizontally and
vertically into rough alignment with its neighbor to the left, then
rotate the image if needed by dragging the bottom edge left or
right - the image pivots around the mid-point of its overlap with
the image to the left. The fastest method is to align the overlap
middle region first, then rotate the right image if needed to bring
the upper and lower overlap regions into alignment. Extreme
accuracy is not needed. Use the [resize] button to get a bigger
combined image after moving them closer together. The images should
be correctly curved and fit together well. If they do not, then the
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">lens mm</span> parameter
(focal length, 35mm equivalent) needs adjustment. The curvature of
the images changes as <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">lens mm</span> is adjusted. The
initial value is obtained from the EXIF data if available, and this
is normally good enough. You can measure and set <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">lens mm</span> manually using the
[search] button described below. If the images have no curvature
(e.g. scanned images), use the <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">no curve</span> checkbox to set the
lens mm effectively to infinity.<br>
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
If an image was trimmed so that the greater dimension (width or
height) was reduced, then the EXIF focal length is no longer valid,
and the EXIF initial value may not work well. A section of an image
taken from the middle has an effective focal length greater than
the original. Increase the <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">lens mm</span> parameter until the
images fit together reasonably well, or use the [search] button to
make a more precise determination (described below).<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">no auto warp</span>
checkbox is normally unchecked. Its purpose is described below.<br>
<br>
The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">manual align</span>
checkbox will use the manual pre-alignment as the final alignment.
This is for images that have no clear features to match and align
the images automatically.<br>
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Press [proceed] when pre-alignment is finished, and the program
will do fine alignment and join the images. Internally, the images
are shifted and rotated and the degree of match is evaluated. This
is done with increasing image sizes until the best match is found.
This may need a minute or more for a weak PC working with large
images. You can speed up the process greatly if you reduce the
input images to 1/2 size. Do this also if the process fails for
lack of memory. Panoramas with 4 large images can require 2+ GB of
memory during processing.<br>
<img style="width: 323px; height: 267px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/panorama2.jpg" vspace="5"><br>
When fine alignment is complete, the combined image is displayed.
The dialog shown here is started, for fine adjustment of brightness
and color match. You may see a sharp border between images if the
images do not have the same brightness and color balance. The [auto
color] button can be used to perform an automatic color match,
which is often satisfactory by itself. Use this button multiple
times to get improved matching at the expense of greater color
shifts that could add a false color tint. Restore the original
image colors with [file color]. The image selected with the Select
Image radio buttons is the starting image for the auto color
matching. Reset using [file color] and select a different starting
image to see results that may be slightly different. The brightness
and RGB color controls allow you to make additional changes to
better match the images. Select one of the images with the radio
buttons, change the values for brightness and color, and press the
[apply] button to see the results. Use [auto color] to match the
other images to the one changed. Use [file color] to restore the
original values from the input images. The blend width input
governs how the images are blended together: at the image joints,
the color balance is gradually shifted over this many pixels, to
mask imbalances that cannot be fully corrected. The default is 1
pixel, which makes any brightness or color differences look
obvious.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
When done, you can use unbend, warp, trim/rotate and other
functions for final adjustments.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Vertical
Panorama</span>&nbsp;<a name="vertical_panorama"></a>(File View
&gt; Combine &gt; Vertical Panorama)<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
This function works the same as horizontal panorama, except that
the images are arranged vertically. To change the order of the
images, drag them from near their centers. To rotate an image, drag
the right edge up or down. It works best to align from the top
down.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Panorama Notes</span><br>
<small><small><small>&nbsp;<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;"></small></small></small> <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Scanned images</span> can be combined
if there is enough overlap. Check "no curve" since there is no
curvature.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Auto Warping</span><br>
The images are slightly warped in various directions during
alignment to find the best match. This is to compensate for shifts
in camera horizon or rotation, causing image distortions that
reduce the quality of fit. If the overlap area of two images
includes a large object that moved in or out between the two
photos, the alignment process may go crazy trying to match the
images, resulting in alignment that is very poor. By selecting
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">no auto warp</span> you
may be able to get the alignment to succeed or have only a small
error. Another option is to select <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">manual align</span>.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Mouse Warp</span><br>
If the images do not align perfectly, you may be able to improve
the alignment by using the mouse to push the images into alignment.
In the final dialog, select <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">mouse warp</span>, select which one
of the images with the radio buttons, and then drag the mouse
carefully along the edge of the image where it should align with
its neighbor, and move the image into alignment. The image is moved
locally around the mouse while more distant parts stay fixed.
Parallax shifting will require a compromise, since it is generally
not possible to keep both foreground and background in
alignment.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Setting lens mm
Automatically</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
The [search] button in the panorama pre-alignment dialog initiates
an automated search for optimum lens mm. Use a suitable image pair:
the subject is 50+ meters away, the images have a low horizon
difference and little relative rotation, and there is plenty of
high-contrast detail in the overlap area. Input your nominal lens
focal length for <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">lens_mm</span>. After doing a decent
pre-align, press the [search] button and wait a while for the
results. Do this a second time and observe the change. If lens mm
remains consistent, you can use it for your panoramas. The search
function steps through a range of values for lens_mm and the image
alignment offsets for x, y, and theta. It searches for the lens
value that give the best alignment results for the given images.
The process needs a minute or more, but you only need to do this
once to characterize a given camera lens and focal length (zoom
setting). Use the [save] button in the 1st dialog to put the focal
length back into the image EXIF data.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif; text-decoration: underline;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Setting lens mm
Manually</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Make a panorama image of a brick wall (or any wall with lots of
detail). The wall should be 5+ meters away. Take two photos with
about 40% overlap. Within the panorama pre-align process, adjust
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">lens_mm</span> until
overlapping bricks coincide. When making the two images, be sure to
turn the camera on a vertical axis through the lens, minimizing
lateral movement and rotation in other axes - otherwise your lens
mm may not be optimal. The result should roughly correspond to the
nominal focal length of your lens (35mm equivalent). It may be off
somewhat (my 27mm lens works best with a lens_mm setting of
29-30mm). I speculate that this is because wide-angle camera lenses
are not ideal lenses (pinhole equivalent). Most panoramas will
still work well even if the lens_mm setting is off by 10%.<br>
&nbsp;<br style="text-decoration: underline;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Color Matching
Problems</span><br>
If the images in a panorama have a large brightness difference in
the overlap areas, the automatic color matching may not work well
enough. The most common problem is false sky colors. You may be
able to improve this by brightening or darkening an input image to
more closely match its neighbors in the overlap areas. Sky can be
easy to fix by selecting the false areas and copying sky from
elsewhere in the image (see <a href="#paint_clone">Paint /
Clone</a>). It seems to work better if you brighten the darker
image instead of darkening the brighter one. You can do this in the
final dialog as described above, or you can do this before starting
the panorama.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Panorama
Limitations</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Panoramas including nearby objects can be tricky: when the photos
are made, be careful to turn the camera on an axis through the
lens, with minimum lateral movement, otherwise the images may align
poorly because foreground objects are shifted against the
background (parallax). This is not an issue when the subject is 50+
meters away, since a small lateral movement has little impact on
the image. Keep the camera level to avoid a large vertical shift
(horizon shift), which can cause image distortions that may not be
fully corrected. Avoid rotating the camera for the same reason.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">PT Panorama</span><a name=
"PT_panorama"></a> (File View &gt; Combine &gt; PT
Panorama)<br style="font-weight: bold;">
The Panorama Tools utilities (via the Hugin package) have been
integrated into Fotoxx under the menu PT Panorama. The user
interface is very simple: specify the input images in any order and
proceed. Everything else is automatic. After a minute or so the
finished panorama is shown and is now the current file in Fotoxx.
The file name is &lt;first input file name&gt;-PT.tif. This is an
8-bit TIF file and is very large. You can save the file as JPEG and
delete the original TIF to save space. Panorama Tools usually does
a fine job, but I have noticed minor alignment errors in some
cases, usually too small to notice. It may be possible to eliminate
these by using the full features of Hugin directly instead of the
automated script used in Fotoxx. They may also be fixed using
Mashup - see the related paragraph in Mashup, below.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="mashup" id=
"mashup"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Mashup</span> (File View &gt;
Combine &gt; Mashup)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 423px; height: 303px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/mashup.jpg" vspace="5"><br>
<br>
Arrange multiple images and text in a layout (photo montage).
Images can be added, resized, rotated and moved around by dragging
with the mouse. Images can be made entirely or partly transparent
in selected areas. Text can be added, moved, resized and rotated.
Text attributes can be specified: font, size, color, outline,
shadow, transparency.&nbsp; Lines and arrows can be added. The
example here shows some of the possibilities.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 229px; height: 172px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/mashup1.jpg" vspace="5"><br>
In the first Mashup dialog, choose a background or layout image
where other images will be placed. Choose an existing image or
create a new monotone image with a specified size and color. You
may also open a previously saved mashup project and continue
editing.<br>
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
<img style="width: 248px; height: 196px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/mashup2.jpg" vspace="5"><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
The 2nd Mashup dialog is a choice: edit images, edit text, edit
lines and arrows, rescale to a larger size, save the completed
composite image (Done) or abandon the image (Cancel). The first
three choices lead to dialogs to perform the respective edits. Each
of these return to this dialog when done, so you can add or modify
images, text, and lines / arrows in any sequence.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
Rescale is explained below.<br>
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
<img style="width: 269px; height: 464px;" alt="" src=
"images/mashup3.jpg" vspace="5"><br>
Use this dialog to select and place images on the layout and revise
their appearance: size, rotation, position, and transparency. An
image may be partly or wholly transparent, overall or within
specified areas. This means that the background image or an
overlapped image can show through the transparent areas. The Add
button leads to a gallery file selection dialog (<a style=
"font-family: sans-serif;" href="#gallery_selection">link</a>).
Selected images are placed on the layout. After the images are
added, click on any image to select it for modifications.&nbsp;
Drag the image from the middle to reposition the image in the
layout. Drag the lower right corner to resize the image. Use the
dialog controls to adjust the image. The dialog controls operate on
the last image added, clicked or dragged. The Next button will
cycle through the images one at a time, flashing the selected
image. This can be used when overlapped images make it difficult to
select the desired image by clicking it. Scale resizes the image.
Angle rotates the image. The Stacking Order buttons raise or lower
an image relative to other images - this determines which of two
overlapping image will be on top. Base Transparency is used to make
an entire image partly transparent. The [paint] button is used to
make any part of an image partly or fully transparent, using the
Paint dialog below. The [warp] button is used to bend or warp an
image, using the Warp dialog below. The black margins checkbox can
be used to remove black margins left by other edit functions, e.g.
warp. These will be made transparent. The Margins controls can be
used to increase edge margins. The Hard margins cut off&nbsp; image
edges. The Blend margins make the edges partly transparent to blend
them into the background or overlapped images.<br style=
"font-weight: bold;">
&nbsp;<br clear="all">
<img style="width: 242px; height: 149px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/mashup4.jpg" vspace="5"><br>
"Paint" more or less transparency for selected image areas. Click
on an image to select it. The mouse will have a circle around it to
show the range of action. Use radius to adjust the size of the
circle. Left-drag the mouse over the image to make it transparent
in the areas covered by the circle. Right-drag to make it opaque.
If Gradual is checked, transparency changes are made slowly as the
mouse is dragged. Specify a power value for the mouse center and
edges to make the changes faster or slower.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<img style="width: 217px; height: 164px;" alt="" src=
"images/mashup3b.jpg" vspace="5"><br>
Click this dialog to insure it is active, and click on an image to
select it. Drag the image with the mouse - the image will warp or
stretch locally in the direction of the mouse (like sheet rubber).
The area of warping is roughly given by warp span, which is a
fraction of the image size. Each drag is a step that&nbsp;adds to
previous steps. Recent steps can be reversed with [undo last], and
the unbent image can be restored with [undo all].<br>
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
<img style="width: 397px; height: 324px;" alt="" src=
"images/mashup5.jpg" vspace="5"><br>
The Edit Text dialog is used for placing text on the layout. Enter
some text and press Add. You are asked to click on the layout where
the text will be added. Drag it into position, then use the dialog
controls to set font, size, color, angle, background color, outline
size and color, shadow size and color, and transparencies for each
of these. Drag the text to a new position at any time. Click on any
existing text to show its properties in the dialog and revise them.
Click on a text and press Delete to remove it. When done editing,
press Done to return to the 2nd Mashup dialog.<br>
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
<img style="width: 387px; height: 270px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/mashup6.jpg" vspace="5"><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
The Edit Line / Arrow dialog is used for placing lines or arrows on
the layout. It works very much like adding text. Enter a length and
width and press Add. You are asked to click on the layout where the
line will be added. A line is placed on the layout, or an arrow if
one of the Arrow head options is checked. Drag the line / arrow to
the desired position. Adjust length, width, angle and attributes
(background, outline, shadow) using the dialog. You can also drag
either end of the line/arrow to reposition that end while leaving
the other end fixed.<br>
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
You can use the mouse to move and resize objects in the layout:<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; click the object to select it - it flashes to
confirm the selection.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; drag from the approximate center to reposition the
object.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; drag the image or text lower right corner to
resize.<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; for a line/arrow, drag either end to move that end
only.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
The keyboard arrow keys can also be used to move the currently
selected object in 1-pixel steps.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
You can also add images saved by <a href="#select_area">Select
Area</a>. In the Edit Images dialog, press [Add] to start the file
selection dialog. Use the [Top] button in the gallery window,
select HOME, then select .fotoxx/saved_areas. Open any of the .png
images found there. The original area outline is used, and edge
blending works from these edges.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Mashup project
files</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
You can save a project and open it later to continue editing.
However, the project file will open successfully only if the layout
image and all the overlay images are still available in their
original locations. The Mashup project is rebuilt using these
images and some saved metadata that is in the project file: image
and text locations, scales, transparency, etc.<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Mashup Rescale</span><br>
Working with a very large layout (over 20 megapixels) can be quite
slow, especially if the PC is not very strong. Dragging a large
overlay image can be slow and jerky. You can work much faster if
you use a smaller layout to build the project, and then make it
larger after you are finished. There is no loss of resolution in
the final image, since the overlay images and text are regenerated
from the inputs (e.g. an image that was scaled to 0.2x in the
initial layout is rescaled to 0.6x if the layout is magnified by
3x). The original full size image file is used for this rescale.
The Rescale button allows you to magnify the project by 2x, 3x or
4x (4x, 9x or 16x by area). There is also a <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">reset</span> option to restore the
original smaller project size. With this method, you can work with
a 10 megapixel layout and resize it up to 160 megapixels when done.
The larger layout can still be worked on directly afterwards, but
it will be much slower.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">PT Panorama
Fix</span><br>
Mashup can be used to fix minor alignment offsets from PT Panorama.
After running PT Panorama, start Mashup (in the same Fotoxx
session), and create a flat layout image with a good size for
editing (e.g. 3000 pixels wide). Start the dialog to add images to
the layout. Navigate to the directory /tmp/fotoxx-xxx/ where you
will find the images left by PT Panorama. They have been color
matched and warped to fit together. Add these images to the layout.
Check the box to make the black margins transparent. Resize them to
fill the layout (all must have the same scale) and move them around
to fit together. Zoom the window larger for precise algnment and
align the images as well as possible. Small misalignments will
persist if the images do not fit perfectly. There may also be
brightness or color mismatches at the image edges, but these can be
fixed later. Start the Warp Images dialog. Drag the mouse in small
steps over a misaligned area to move an image into alignment with
its neighbor. Use a small span (e.g. 0.1) to insure that correcting
one misalignment does not create others elsewhere. Several cycles
of dragging the images in several locations may be needed, but with
patience you can make the alignments perfect. If there are visible
brightness or color mismatches at image edges, blend these together
using the margin blend controls. This should be done only after the
alignment has been perfected - otherwise this will cause blurring
where the images do not align, making alignment corrections harder
to see and control. Lastly, rescale the layout to a larger size if
wanted. This does not lose resolution, since the input images are
rescaled and the warps are rescaled and re-applied.<br>
<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="undo_redo" id="undo_redo"></a><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Undo/Redo Button</span> (File View
&gt; Undo/Redo)<br>
<u>If an edit function is active</u> and the image has been
changed:<br>
&nbsp; + left mouse click will undo the current edit<br>
&nbsp; + right mouse click will redo the edit<br>
This allows you to rapidly compare the "before" and "after" images
for the current edit function.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<u>If no edit function is active</u>, but one or more edit
functions were done to the current image:<br>
&nbsp; + left mouse click will undo one edit step per click<br>
&nbsp; + right mouse click will redo one edit step per click<br>
&nbsp; + if combined with the <span style=
"font-weight: bold;">A-key</span>, undo/redo ALL edits (compare
original and final images)<br>
&nbsp; + middle mouse click pops-up a list of all edit steps -
select any step to go back to<br>
&nbsp; + use the escape key to abandon the list without making any
selection<br>
&nbsp;<br>
&nbsp;<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="batch_menu" id="batch_menu"></a>&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>
<img style="width: 43px; height: 43px;" alt="" src=
"images/batch.png">&nbsp;<br>

<big><span style="font-weight: bold;">Batch Menu</span></big>
<big><small>(Gallery View &gt; Batch)</small></big><br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="batch_convert" id=
"batch_convert"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Batch Convert Files</span>
<big><small>(Gallery View &gt; Batch &gt; Batch
Convert)</small></big><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
This function is used to rename, convert, resize, upright and move
multiple image files at once. An overlay image can also be added at
a selected position (e.g. a title, credit line or copyright
notice).<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 446px; height: 391px;" alt="" src=
"images/batch-convert.jpg"
hspace="5" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear=
"all">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<table style="text-align: left; font-family: sans-serif;" height=
"266" width="744" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Select
Files<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Select files to convert
from a gallery window (<a href=
"#gallery_selection">link</a>).<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>New Name<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Optional new name with
optional inserted text (photo date, sequence
number)<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Sequence
Numbers<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Starting sequence number
and adder for each output file.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>New
Location<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Optional new directory
location for the converted files.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>new
file type<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>File type for converted
images, or "no change".<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>max.
width, height<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Output images will fit
within these dimensions (ratio is not changed).<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>delete
originals<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Delete the input files
after successful conversion.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>copy
metadata<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Copy all EXIF and IPTC
metadata to the output files.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>upright<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>If an image is rotated 90
degrees, upright it (if status known from EXIF).<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>sharpen<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Sharpen output images using
the two supplied parameters<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Overlay
Image<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Add an overlay image at a
selected position in the output images. See below.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Make constant
size<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Make the visual overlay
size independent of image dimensions. See Below<br></small></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Plugins</span><br>
The new file name may have inserted text: a photo date (from EXIF
metadata), a sequence number, or the original file name. Specify
what and where to insert with the following text:<br>
<table style="text-align: left;" height="68" width="737" border="1"
cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;$oldname<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>The original file name is
inserted here<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;$s...<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>A running sequence number
is inserted here. See below.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;$yyyy $mm
$dd<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>The photo date (year,
month, day) is inserted at these positions<br></small></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<br>
Example: San Francisco $yyyy-$mm-$dd $oldname $sss<br>
The input image file "Golden Gate Bridge.jpg", with a photo date of
May 12, 2014, would convert<br>
to the following output file name: "San Francisco 2014-05-12 Golden
Gate Bridge 123.jpg".<br>
<br>
For the "$s..." plugin, specify the length of the field with the
number of 's' characters. Leading zeros are added for sequence
numbers with fewer digits. Sequence numbers not fitting in the
specified length will be as long as needed. Keep in mind that the
file name sort order in the galleries is strictly ascii order, so
the sequence of numbers 1, 2 ... 9, 10 will sort as 1, 10, 2 ... 9
(if these are leading characters in the file names). You can keep
the numeric order by specifying a field lenght of 2 (in this case),
resulting in the sequence 01, 02 ... 09, 10.&nbsp;<br>
<br>
Either "$oldname" or "$s..." must be present to insure output file
names are unique.<br>
If <span style="text-decoration: underline;">New Location</span> is
missing or unchanged, <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">delete originals</span> is
ignored.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
If an output file already exists, the input file is not
converted.<br>
For an explanation of the sharpen parameters, see the <a href=
"#sharpen_image">Sharpen</a> function.<br>
<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Overlay Image</span><br>
A small overlay image can be added at a selected position in all
the output images. Use the <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Open</span> button to select the
image file. The overlay image will be scaled to <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Width</span> percent of the output
image width. The position is selected by clicking one of the
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Position</span> buttons.
If <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Make constant
size</span> is checked, the visual size of the overlay image will
be made constant for the selected screen or window dimensions.
Without this, a "tall" image that displays with left and right
margins would have a visually smaller overlay.<br>
<br>
An overlay image can be used to add a title, credit line or
copyright to the converted output images. Prepare the overlay image
as follows: Use <a href="#new_blank_image">New Blank Image</a> to
create a base image to hold the text. The scale does not matter, so
make it larger than needed, say 1000 pixels wide. Use <a href=
"#paint_transp">Paint Transparency</a> to paint the entire base
image transparent. Use <a href="#add_text"><span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Add Text</span></a> to put the
desired text on the base image, using the font, color, and other
attributes as desired. Scale the text to fill most of the base
image. The text is visible and the base image (background) is
transparent. Use <a href="#trim_rotate">Trim</a> to remove excess
margins if needed. Save the final image; a convenient location
is&nbsp; ~<span style=
"font-family: Liberation Mono;">/.fotoxx/saved_areas,</span> but
any directory can be used. This image is now ready to use as an
overlay image for Batch Convert.<br>
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Albums</span><br style=
"font-weight: bold;">
If image files are renamed or moved using Batch Convert, and if
deletion of the original image files was also specified, then all
albums containing any of the input files are updated to reflect the
new names and locations.<br>
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Upload Photos to a
Website</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Most photo websites have the ability to upload multiple image files
from a single directory, using only a web browser. Use the above
Fotoxx function to select, resize, and export image files to the
desktop or any other directory. From there, use the photo website's
native browser interface to upload the image files.<br>
<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Preserving File
Sequence</span><br>
If you use a leading sequence number, the input file sequence will
be preserved at the output location. Thus you can select image
files in any order, or use an album with ordered images, and
preserve this sequence in the output.<br>
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="batch_upright" id=
"batch_upright"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Batch Upright</span>
<big><small>(Gallery View &gt; Batch &gt; Batch
Upright)</small></big><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;"><img style=
"width: 223px; height: 109px;" alt="" src=
"images/batch-upright.jpg"
vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"></span> This
function works like Batch Convert Files but only does the upright
function. It uprights image files rotated 90 degrees. It depends on
EXIF data to know if a file is rotated. It is much faster than
Batch Convert Files. You can simply select all candidate files and
let it find the ones that are rotated. The search speed is about
3000 image files per minute on a strong PC. There are two options
to specify the files to search. <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Select Files</span> leads to a
gallery file selection dialog (<a href=
"#gallery_selection">link</a>). <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Survey all files</span> will check
all image files in your database and upright those that are
rotated.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>
<a name="batch_delete_trash" id="batch_delete_trash"></a>&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Batch Delete/Trash</span>
<big><small>(Gallery View &gt; Batch &gt;
Delete/Trash)</small></big><br>
<img style="width: 219px; height: 107px;" alt="" src=
"images/batch-delete-trash.jpg"
vspace="5"><br>
Select files from a gallery (<a href=
"#gallery_selection">link</a>).<br>
Select the option to delete or move to trash.<br>
[Proceed]<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="batch_raw" id=
"batch_raw"></a> &nbsp;<a name="batch_raw_therapee"></a><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Batch RAW</span>
<big><small>(Gallery View &gt; Batch &gt; Batch
RAW)</small></big><br style="font-weight: bold;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Batch Raw Therapee</span>
<big><small>(Gallery View &gt; Batch &gt; Batch Raw
Therapee)</small></big><br>
<img style="width: 478px; height: 208px;" alt="" src=
"images/batch-convert-raw.jpg"
hspace="5" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear=
"all">
These functions convert selected RAW image files to JPEG, PNG-8,
PNG-16, TIFF-8 or TIFF-16 format, using the library program
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">libraw</span> or the
application program <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Raw
Therapee</span>. The PNG and TIFF formats have either 8 or 16 bits
per color. RAW files generally have 10-12 bits per color, and noise
beyond that. Therefore use a 16-bit format to keep all of the data
available from a RAW file. The difference between 8- and 16-bit
color is rarely visible, but a higher color depth provides a
greater margin for retouch functions that can radically shift the
brightness distribution, causing a problem known as "banding" or
"posterization".<br>
<br>
Use the [Select Files] button to choose one or more RAW image files
from a gallery window (<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href=
"#gallery_selection">link</a>). Choose one of the output formats.
Choose one of the downsize options if wanted, and set the auto
sharpen parameters if wanted. See the <a href=
"#sharpen_image">Sharpen</a> function for an explanation of these
parameters.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br>
The image files are converted one at a time and displayed in the
main window. Depending on the number of files, this can take a long
time (a strong PC does about 40 files per minute for most RAW file
types and TIFF-16 output). PNG-16 produces much smaller files than
TIFF-16 because the files are compressed (with no quality loss).
This also needs more time to do the compression work.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>
<a name="script_files" id="script_files"></a>&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Script Files</span>
<big><small>(Gallery View &gt; Batch &gt; Script
Files)</small></big><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;"><img style=
"width: 215px; height: 134px;" alt="" src=
"images/script-files.jpg"
hspace="5" vspace="5"><br></span> Script files allow you to define
a set of edits once, and carry them out on as many image files as
you wish. This can be useful when many photos of the same subject
were made under the same lighting. You can choose one photo and
edit it to perfection, recording every function used and adjustment
made in the dialogs and curves. Then you can apply these edits to
the entire batch of photos. Certainly this will not be as good as
editing each photo individually, but it is much faster, and you can
always go back and make additional adjustments after viewing the
results.<br>
<br>
Press [start] to begin a new script file. You will be asked to
assign a file name for the script. The script dialog now exits. Now
choose an image file and perform your edits. After each edit
function is done, a message appears to confirm its addition to the
script. All the dialog inputs and curve edits are now saved in the
script file. After the last edit, open the script menu again and
choose [close] to complete the script.<br>
<br>
To execute a script, open the script menu and choose [run]. You
will be asked to select a script file to execute and a set of image
files to process with the script. When you complete the image file
selections, the script starts up and processes all the image files
in sequence. You can watch the action as the images fly past. All
modified images are saved as new versions, so the original files
are not lost. Those you decide you no longer need can be quickly
removed using the <a href="#batch_delete_trash">Batch
Delete/Trash</a> function.<br>
<br>
If RAW files are processed, the corresponding outputs are TIF-16
files.<br>
<br>
Not all edit functions are scriptable. Some edit functions use
mouse drags on the image, e.g. Trim/Rotate and all warping
functions. These are not scriptable. If you try to use one of these
while building the script, you are told this is not possible.<br>
<br>
The following functions are currently scriptable. Others are
possible but have not been converted for scripting. If there is a
need for some function not included, <a href=
"http://kornelix.net/contact/contact.html">contact me</a>.<br>
<small><small><small><small>&nbsp;<br></small></small></small></small>
<table style="text-align: left; width: 591px; height: 296px;"
border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Retouch Combo</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Brightness/Contrast/Color
adjustments</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Adjust Brightness
Dist.</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Reshape the brightness
distribution</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Zonal Flatten</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Enhance dark areas with low
contrast</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Tone Mapping</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Enhance local contrast
where weak</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Resize</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Specify width/height or
ratio (e.g. 1/2)</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Voodoo1</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Automatic
enhance</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Voodoo2</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Automatic
enhance</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Sharpen<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Sharpen fuzzy
edges<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Blur</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Blur image<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Denoise<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Reduce image
noise<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Shift Colors</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Tune colors</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Adjust RGB/CMY</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Tune colors</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Brightness
Ramp</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Vary brightness across the
image</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Color Mode</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Change B&amp;W/color or
positive/negative</small></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="burn_DVD" id=
"burn_DVD"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Burn Images to DVD / BRD</span>
<big><small>(Gallery View &gt; Batch &gt; Burn Images to
DVD/BRD)<br>
<img style="width: 300px; height: 122px;" alt="" src=
"images/burn_DVD.jpg"
vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;"></small></big>
Select any number of image files and copy ("burn") them to a DVD or
BlueRay optical disc.<br>
<ol>
<li>Insert a blank disc and wait for the initial clatter to finish.
A message may appear asking you what to do with the blank disc, or
a program may start which the window manager thinks you want to
run. Dismiss this window or program.<br></li>
<li>Start the Fotoxx Burn function after step 1 is
complete.<br></li>
<li>The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Select
Files</span> button starts a dialog for selecting the image files
to be copied (<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href=
"#gallery_selection">link</a>).<br>
Select any image files, but stay within the capacity of the disc
(DVD 4.7 GB, BRD 25 GB).<br></li>
<li>Select a DVD/BRD disc drive to use from the drop-down list
(even if there is only one).<br></li>
<li>Press the <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Start</span> button. The list of
selected image files is sent to <a href=
"http://linuxcommand.org/man_pages/growisofs1.html">growisofs</a>.<br>

This is an optical disc recording utility used by K3b, Brasero, and
others.<br></li>
<li>Progress is shown in a popup window, along with any growisofs
error messages.<br>
The job will fail right away if the selected files do not fit on
the selected disc.</li>
</ol>
The resulting disc is frozen. Leftover space cannot be used later
to add more images.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="find_duplicates" id="find_duplicates"></a><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Find Duplicate Images</span>
<big><small>(Gallery View &gt; Batch &gt; Find Duplicate
Images)</small></big><br>
<img style="width: 283px; height: 223px;" alt="" src=
"images/find-dups.jpg"
vspace="5"><br>
This function is used to find duplicated image files anywhere
within your image database. A duplicate image file can be an image
file that exactly duplicates another image file, or an image file
that "almost" duplicates another. For the sake of speed, thumbnail
images are compared in memory. Hence it is possible that identical
thumbnails are found for which the main images have some minor
(likely invisible) differences that do not show up in the
thumbnails. An image copy that was reduced to 1/2 size is likely be
classified as a duplicate. The thumbnail size can be set from 32 to
256 pixels (max. width or height). A larger size reduces the
probability of false positives. The thumbnail size greatly affects
the amount of main memory required - e.g. for 100K images, size 32
needs 220 MB, whereas size 64 needs 880 MB. The memory required is
roughly size x size x 0.75 x 3 x (image count). Two parameters are
used to set the sensitivity for detection of identical or nearly
identical images: pixel difference is the RGB value difference
below which pixels are considered equal. Set to 1 to detect any
pixel difference. pixel count is the number of different pixels
below which two images are classified as duplicates. Example: if
pixel difference = 3 and pixel count = 100, then images are
classified as duplicates if fewer than 100 pixels are different by
less than 3. The output is a gallery view, showing each set of
duplicate images. Screening 8K images needs about 16 seconds on a
strong PC.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="export_filelist" id="image_list"></a><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Export File List</span>&nbsp;
<big><small>(Gallery View &gt; Batch &gt; Export File
List)</small></big><br>
<img style="width: 395px; height: 115px;" alt="" src=
"images/create-images-file.jpg"
hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>
This function is used to create a file containing a list of image
files. These are fully qualified file names, one per line in the
text output file. This has no use inside Fotoxx. If you need to
select images to feed into a shell script or another program, this
is the way. The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Select
Files</span> button starts a dialog for selecting the image files
(<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href=
"#gallery_selection">link</a>). Use the <u>Browse</u> button to
select or define the output file.<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Batch and search functions in
the</span> <a style="font-weight: bold;" href=
"#metadata_menu">Metadata</a> <span style="font-weight: bold;">menu
are duplicated here in the Batch menu.</span><br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>
&nbsp;<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="tools_menu" id="tools_menu"></a>&nbsp;<br>
<img style="width: 40px; height: 40px;" alt="" src=
"images/tools.png" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<big><span style="font-weight: bold;">Tools Menu</span>
<small>(File View &gt; Tools)</small></big><br>
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="index_files" id=
"index_files"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Index Image Files</span>
<big><small>(File View &gt; Tools &gt; Index Image
Files)</small></big><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 403px; height: 342px;" alt="" src=
"images/index-image-files.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
The Index Image Files function runs whenever Fotoxx is started.
This function will create missing thumbnails, replace outdated
ones, and refresh the metadata index using current data from your
image files. This may need significant time if you have many
thousands of new images. A strong PC can process about 1700 image
files per minute, but some PCs will be much slower. "Strong PC"
means a 3 GHz multi-core CPU, 8 GB RAM, and a 7200 rpm disk. If
there are no new image files, indexing completes quickly and Fotoxx
startup time is fast (under one second on a strong PC hosting 10000
image files). If you use an SSD disk, the indexing speed increases
to about 3000 per minute.<br>
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Image files modified or moved within Fotoxx are taken care of
automatically. The Index function is only needed when new image
files are created from outside Fotoxx (e.g. a new batch of photos
is added into the directories used by Fotoxx), or if files are
moved or renamed from outside Fotoxx.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Index Image Files starts automatically at Fotoxx startup. It can
also be started manually from the Tools menu. Unless there are
hundreds of new images to process, this will be done in a few
seconds.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Enter your <span style="text-decoration: underline;">top image
directories</span> (e.g. /home/&lt;user&gt;/Pictures). Enter the
directory paths directly in the window, or use the [browse] button
to locate and add directories. These directories and any
subdirectories containing images will be processed. It does not
matter if other files are mixed with the images. The simplest way
is to use /home/&lt;user&gt; as the only top directory, but it is
better to separate the image files from the hundreds of thousands
of other files that may be under /home/&lt;user&gt;. Delete an
entry by clicking the corresponding <span style=
"font-weight: bold;">X</span>.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Enter the <span style="text-decoration: underline;">thumbnails
directory</span> where thumbnail files will be stored. Use the
supplied default or set your own location. The directory name must
end with .../thumbnails, and this will be added to your selection
if needed. The directory is created if not already present.
Indexing will run faster if this is on a separate physical disk
from the image files. Thumbnail files need typically 1% as much
space as your image files (10 KB instead of 1-2 MB for a typical
JPEG file).<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
If you have used directory or file names to classify your images,
you can make immediate use of these in the Search Images function.
If you have saved dates, captions, tags, geotags, titles, or
ratings in your image metadata (using Photoshop or other apps),
these will also be searchable. After the images have been indexed,
searching them by any of these criteria is almost instantaneous.
Any other items in the image metadata can also be searched, but at
a slower speed. See <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href=
"#search_images">Search Images</a> for details.<br>
<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Fotoxx Startup
Time</span><br>
If you have a huge image collection, the first startup after a
reboot may need significant time, even if there are no new image
files. Subsequent startups are faster becuase the image index file
and the image directories are now cached in memory. If startup time
is still a problem, you can bypass the indexing. This may be
especially useful if you use a file manager (e.g. Nautilus) to
start Fotoxx with a selected image file, and you want the image to
display instantly. See the User Options topic immediately below for
more information.<br>
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="user_options" id=
"user_options"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">User Options</span>
<big><small>(File View &gt; Tools &gt; User
Options)</small></big><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Various user preferences and settings are collected in this
dialog.<br>
They are also saved in the file&nbsp;
/home/&lt;user&gt;/.fotoxx/parameters.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 464px; height: 473px;" alt="" src=
"images/user-options.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>
<small><small><small>&nbsp;<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;"></small></small></small>
<table style="text-align: left; font-family: sans-serif;" height=
"586" width="871" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;">
<small>&nbsp;Startup Display&nbsp;</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Determines the initial
window content when Fotoxx is started.<br>
Recent Files: the most recently viewed or edited image files
(gallery display).<br>
Newest Files: image files most recently added to the Fotoxx
database (gallery).<br>
Previous Gallery: the directory of the last image viewed
(gallery).<br>
Previous Image: show the last image viewed.<br>
Blank Window: start with no current image and the top image
directory in the gallery.<br>
Directory Gallery: the given image directory.<br>
Image File: the given image file.</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;Browse<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Opens a dialog to browse
for the starting directory or image file (last 2 options
above).<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;">
<small>&nbsp;Menu Style</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>The menu style: icons only
or both text and icons.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;">
<small>&nbsp;Window background<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>The background color for
the main window containint the current image.<br>
This is the color outside image margins when image width and height
do not fit the window.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Dialog
font<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>The font name and size to
use in all menus and dialogs (Bold, Italic, etc. are
ignored).<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;">
<small>&nbsp;Image Pan/Scroll<br>
&nbsp;(zoomed image)</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Drag: image moves with the
dragged mouse.<br>
Scroll: image moves against the dragged mouse (like invisible
scroll bars).<br>
Magnified: movement is magnified: multiple drags for large movement
are not needed.</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;">
<small>&nbsp;Zooms for 2x<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Choose 1, 2, or 3 zooms for
each 2x increase in image size.</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;JPEG
quality</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>The default quality value
when saving an image as a jpeg file type.</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Thumbnail
size<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>The pixel size for gallery
thumbnail width/height: 128 | 256 | 512 (default 256). 512 is a bit
slower but better for a large monitor or one with a high DPI
resolution, or when viewing large galleries. If this is changed,
you need to delete your thumbnail files so that the file index
process will rebuild them with the new size (next Fotoxx
startup).<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Curve node<br>
&nbsp; capture distance<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>The minimum node separation
for edit curves. Also the mouse capture threshold when a node is
clicked or dragged. The default is 5% of scale, allowing up to 20
nodes in a curve. If you use a touchpad instead of a mouse, set
this value higher to compensate for lower positioning accuracy.
Flexibility for extreme curve bending will be
less.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Map marker
size<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>The size of the markers
(red dots) marking image locations on maps.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;">
<small>&nbsp;last file version</small><br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Show only the last version
of image files, for both file view and gallery view (if a
directory).<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;shift image
right<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>If the window is wider than
the image, shift the image right to maximize left margin for
dialogs.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;image index level<br>
&nbsp;(2 parameters)<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>0 / 1 / 2 = no image index
/ old index only / old + updates for new image files<br>
See below for a complete explanation.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;RAW file
types</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>The RAW file types
recognized. If your camera uses something else, add it to the list
and this may work.<br>
You can also shorten the list to those file types you actually
use.</small></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Image index
level</span><br>
These two parameters govern a tradeoff between fast Fotoxx startup
time and the completeness of the image index. A complete image
index is required for accurate results from image search and map
functions. Building a complete image index when Fotoxx starts can
take from 1 second to hours (if a proper indexing has never been
completed and you have hundreds of thousands of image files). The
time to complete the startup depends on the following factors:<br>
<ul>
<li>The first startup after a reboot needs much more time than
subsequent startups. Subsequent startups are faster because the
index file and the image directories are now cached in memory.
First startup time with a 5400 rpm disk is roughly 1 second per 10K
image files. Subsequent times are roughly 5x faster. First startup
with an SSD disk is roughly 1 second per 40K image files (these
numbers assume a strong PC).<br></li>
<li>If there are (new) image files that have never been indexed,
they must be found and added to the image index. New files are
processed at 1000-3000 per minute, depending on your computer and
disk speed.<br></li>
</ul>
If you start Fotoxx by selecting a file from your file manager
(e.g. Nautilus), you may want to see the image immediately and not
wait for indexing to complete. You can control this with the two
parameters <span style="text-decoration: underline;">image index
level</span>.<br>
<ul>
<li>The first parameter controls how Fotoxx indexes when started
from a launcher or command. The 2nd parameter controls how Fotoxx
indexes when started by clicking a file in Nautilus, etc.<br></li>
<li>A value of '0' means no indexing at all. Startup is very fast.
Image search and map functions are disabled. Editing images and
metadata can still be done normally.</li>
<li>A value of '1' means load the old index file but do not search
for new image files to update the index. Startup time is moderately
fast. Image search and map functions do work, but any new (not yet
indexed) image files are excluded from the outputs.</li>
<li>A value of '2' means full indexing: load the old index file,
search for new files, merge these two, and update the index file.
This is the slowest option. Image search and map functions produce
complete results.</li>
</ul>
You can also start the index process manually (Tools &gt; Index
Image Files) if you want to use search and map functions with
complete results. You do not have to go back to User Options and
change the parameters.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="KB_shortcuts" id=
"KB_shortcuts"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Keyboard Shortcuts</span>
<big><small>(File View &gt; Tools &gt; Keyboard
Shortcuts)</small></big> (key K)&nbsp;<br>
<img style="width: 719px; height: 444px;" alt="" src=
"images/KB-shortcuts.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
This function is used to view or change custom keyboard shortcuts.
The currently assigned shortcuts are shown in the first window. If
you press the [Edit] button, the second dialog is shown, where you
can add and change keyboard shortcuts. Enter a new shortcut using
the keyboard. You can use the keys A-Z, 0-9, F2-F9, and most of the
symbols (# $ &amp; ^ &lt; etc.). You can combine a key with Ctrl,
Alt or Shift: Press and hold Ctrl, Alt or Shift, then press the
key, then release both. Select one of the available menu
assignments from the drop-down list. To remove a shortcut, select
it and press [Delete]. Press [Done] when you are finished. If you
press [Cancel] or [x] all changes will be discarded.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="brightness_graph" id=
"brightness_graph"></a>&nbsp;&nbsp;<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Brightness Distribution
Graph</span> <big><small>(File View &gt; Tools &gt; Brightness
Graph)<br>
<img style="width: 282px; height: 252px;" alt="" src=
"images/brightness-graph.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;"></small></big> This function opens a
small window that shows a brightness distribution graph of the
current image in the main window, or the currently selected area of
the image. This graph updates immediately for new images or as edit
functions change the image. There are four graphs in four colors:
red, green, blue graphs are for the respective colors. The black
graph is for overall brightness. Use the buttons [Red] [Green]
[Blue] and [White] to select the colors to show. White means all
colors added together.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="grid_lines" id=
"grid_lines"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Grid Lines</span>
<big><small>(File View &gt; Tools &gt; Grid Lines)</small></big>
(key Alt+G)&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 355px; height: 191px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/grid-lines.jpg" vspace="5"><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;" clear="all">
This function adds or removes horizontal and vertical lines across
the image. The lines are useful when an image must be rotated for
horizon alignment, or when an image is unbent or warped to
straighten walls or other objects in the image. The settings for x-
and y-spacing control the spacing (pixels) between the lines. If
the controls for x- and y-count are NOT zero, then the x- and
y-spacing values are ignored and the number of lines will be set to
these counts. Example: set x- and y-count to 2 lines each in order
to divide the image into thirds horizontally and vertically. The x-
and y-enable checkboxes can be used to enable and disable the
vertical and horizontal lines separately. The keyboard shortcut
Alt+G can be used to toggle the grid lines on and off (this
shortcut can be <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href=
"#KB_shortcuts">changed</a>). If an image is printed with grid
lines enabled, the grid lines are also printed. The x- and y-offset
controls can be used to shift the grid lines to intersect a desired
point in the image.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear=
"all">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Several edit functions have a button [grid] which starts this same
dialog. The resulting grid line settings are specific to that
function only, and will be restored whenever that function is in
use.<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>
<a name="line_color" id="line_color"></a>&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Line Color</span>
<big><small>(File View &gt; Tools &gt; Line Color)</small></big>
Change Color of Foreground Lines<br>
Some functions draw lines over the image (Trim/Rotate, Area
Outlines, others). You can change the color of these lines to
maximize contrast against the background image. The small dialog
can be left open while editing, to conviently switch among the
available colors (black, white, red, green).<br style=
"font-weight: bold;" clear="all">
&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="show_RGB" id=
"show_RGB"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Show RGB</span> <big><small>(File
View &gt; Tools &gt; Show RGB)</small></big><br>
<img style="width: 247px; height: 279px;" alt="" src=
"images/show-RGB.jpg" vspace="5"><br>
When a point on the image is clicked, the RGB values are shown in a
dialog window. The last 9 clicked points are displayed. The values
have the format xxx.dd, where xxx is the upper 8 bits of the color
value and .dd is the lower 8 bits. The range is 0.00 to 255.99. The
lower 8 bits are zero unless the image is being edited or the image
is a 16-bit TIFF or PNG file. EV (exposure value) is an alternative
unit, useful for precise color adjustment. EV is zero for
mid-brightness (128). The outputs are updated immediately if the
image is being edited. The last nine points clicked are shown. The
points are labeled on the image corresponding to the letters A-I in
the dialog window. If "delta" is checked and the image is being
edited, then the changes are shown instead of the absolute values.
If no edit is active, "delta" does nothing.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<table style=
"text-align: left; width: 557px; height: 32px; font-family: sans-serif;"
border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp; RGB</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>0</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>1</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>2</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>4</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>8</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>16</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>32</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>64</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>128</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>256</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp; EV</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>nan</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>-7</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>-6</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>-5</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>-4</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>-3</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>-2</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>-1</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>0</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>1</small></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>
<a name="magnify" id="magnify"></a><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Magnify Image</span>
<big><small>(File View &gt; Tools &gt; Magnify Image)</small></big>
(key X)<br>
<img style="width: 530px; height: 373px;" alt="" src=
"images/magnify-image.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>
This function magnifies the image in an area around the mouse
pointer. Left-drag the mouse around the image to magnify different
areas, analogous to viewing a printed image through a magnifying
glass. Use the dialog to adjust the radius of the area and the
amount of magnification. A mouse click will end the magnify, and a
new mouse drag will start it again. Use the X-key shortcut to start
or end the Magnify function.<br>
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="darkbrite_pixels" id=
"darkbrite_pixels"></a>&nbsp;<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif; font-weight: bold;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Dark / Bright Pixels</span>
<big><small>(File View &gt; Tools &gt; Dark/Bright
Pixels)</small></big><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
This function is used to highlight the darkest and brightest pixels
in an image. Adjust the two sliders to set the brightness
thresholds, which are initially 0 for dark pixels and 255 for
bright pixels. Pixels with a brightness less than the dark
threshold or greater than the bright threshold are highlighted on
the image. The image responds quickly to changes in the sliders.
You can use this function in parallel with edit functions to
control edit results.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="monitor_color" id=
"monitor_color"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Monitor Color</span>
<big><small>(File View &gt; Tools &gt; Monitor
Color)</small></big><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 417px; height: 262px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/colorchart.png" vspace="5"><br>
Eight color bands are written across the screen with brightness
from zero (black) to 100%. You can use this to adjust the
brightness of your monitor. The left end of each stripe should be
as black as possible, but you should start to see some color within
a few mm from the left edge. If the completely black portion is
wider than this, adjust the monitor. There are 255 brightness steps
from black to 100% (8 bits per color). The steps are too small to
distinguish with the eye. This evaluation should be done in a
darkened room (with little external light falling on the
monitor).<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="monitor_gamma" id=
"monitor_gamma"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Monitor Gamma</span>
<big><small>(File View &gt; Tools &gt; Monitor
Gamma)</small></big><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 146px; height: 345px;" alt="" src=
"images/gammachart-reduced.png" vspace="5"><br>
Gamma determines how RGB brightness values (0-255) are converted
into brightness on the monitor. The standard value is 2.2 and this
should normally be used for image editing. Adjust the dialog slider
until the middle band has the same brightness as the upper and
lower bands at scale location 2.2. Be far enough from the monitor
that you cannot see the fine lines in the chart. The chart only
works at 100% size, so do not zoom the chart. The command line
utility "xgamma" is required (normally present).<br>
<br>
The chart image originates from <a style="font-family: sans-serif;"
href=
"http://www.normankoren.com/makingfineprints1A.html#gammachart"
target="_blank">Norman Koren</a>. The linked web site has more
information about this chart.<br>
The chart here in the User Guide has been reduced<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="change_language" id=
"change_language"></a><span style="font-weight: bold;">&nbsp;<br>
Change Language</span> <big><small>(File View &gt; Tools &gt;
Change Lanuguage)</small></big><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
This function allows you to change the GUI to one of the available
languages. If your language is not available or has missing
translations, consider making a translation. See menu Help &gt;
Translations.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="missing_translations" id=
"missing_translations"></a>&nbsp;<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Missing Translations</span>
<big><small>(File View &gt; Tools &gt; Missing
Translations)</small></big><br style=
"font-weight: bold; font-family: sans-serif;">
This function lists all missing translations to a popup window.
Translations left as English are not reported, since this is often
deliberate, e.g. words like "font" or "icon".<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="calibrate_printer" id="calibrate_printer"></a>&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Printer Color Calibration</span>
<big><small>(File View &gt; Tools &gt; Calibrate
Printer)</small></big><br>
This utility may be able to improve the color accuracy of printed
images.<br>
<img style="width: 197px; height: 279px;" alt="" src=
"images/printer-calibrate-chart.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5" align=
"left"><br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">How It Works</span><br>
A chart of known colors is printed on the target printer. Some of
the printed colors will be slightly wrong due to printer
imperfections. This printed page is scanned into a file, and the
colors in this file are compared to the original colors that were
sent to the printer. Any differences are errors that are now known.
When an image file is printed, these errors are subtracted from the
image colors before printing. The printer adds the errors back,
leaving a result that is theoretically correct. Practice may be
otherwise. My own result was a modest improvement, detailed
below.<br>
&nbsp;<br clear="all">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Hopeful
Assumptions</span><br>
<ul>
<li>Your scanner produces accurate colors. Scanners are generally
more accurate than printers.<br></li>
<li>The printer color errors are small enough that negating them
before printing will cancel<br>
most of the error. This is less likely if the errors are
large.<br></li>
<li>The limited set of colors in the chart (1728) can be used to
calculate all other colors.<br>
(each color adjustment is interpolated from the nearby colors in
the chart).<br></li>
</ul>
Perform the following steps in sequence, as listed by the dialog
window. Each step has instructions to perform the step. All files
normally reside in the directory <span style=
"font-family: Liberation Mono;">/home/&lt;user&gt;/.fotoxx/printer_color/.</span><br>

<ol>
<li>Generate and print the color chart file <span style=
"font-family: Liberation Mono;">(printchart.png</span>) on the
printer to be calibrated.<br>
Use a large paper size (A4 or US Letter), vertical paper
orientation, no margins.<br></li>
<li>Scan the printed chart into a PNG file. Use 300 dpi or more to
make a large file.<br></li>
<li>Edit the PNG image to trim off margins left by the scanner.
Save the edited image<br>
as &lt;chosen-name&gt;.png. Use a name indicating the printer
settings and type of paper.<br></li>
<li>Process the edited chart file to create a color map file
&lt;chosen-name&gt;.dat.<br>
Use a name indicating the printer settings and type of paper
used.<br></li>
<li>Print a color-adjusted image. You are asked for the color map
file created in step 4.<br></li>
</ol>
Once you have made the color map file, you can print any image
using step 5 only.<br>
There is also a File menu function to do step 5 only: <a href=
"#print_image">Print Calibrated</a>.<br>
<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Precautions For Best
Results</span><br>
<ul>
<li>Use a large paper size for printing the chart (A4 or US Letter)
to make the color tiles as big as possible.</li>
<li>Clean the scanner glass before scanning the color chart. Dust
spots or smudges will falsify the colors.<br></li>
<li>Scan with a high DPI setting (300+) to make a large chart file.
This will make the next step more accurate.<br></li>
<li>Scanners can skew a scanned image into a slightly
non-rectangular form. If this happens, you will notice it when
trying to trim off the margins: the fat green margin lines will not
align perfectly with the trim rectangle, even after slightly
rotating the image for best fit. If this happens, use <a href=
"#fix_perspective"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">Fix
Perspective</span></a> to square the image first, then trim the
margins.</li>
<li>When editing the scanned chart image, be sure the darkest row
is at the top. Trim off the margins surrounding the color tiles.
Use the fat green margin line surrounding the color tiles as a
guide: cut off this line exactly, leaving only the tiles. Work with
2x magnification while adjusting the trim rectangle. Accurate
trimming is critical. The tile positions are calculated from the
final image dimensions, assuming 35 equal columns and 50 equal
rows. If some edge tiles are cut short, or if margins are left,
then the calculated tile positions will be offset, and the measured
colors will be wrong. A small error of 1-2 pixels is tolerated,
because the outer 20% of each tile is not used to read the tile
color. You can use the keyboard arrow keys to make 1-pixel
movements in the trim rectangle. The last corner pulled with the
mouse is the corner that the arrow keys will move.<br></li>
<li>If you notice any black or white spots in the scanned chart
image (from dust), fix them with <a href=
"#paint_clone">Paint/Clone</a>.<br></li>
<li>The output color map file can be used only for the paper, ink,
and printer settings used for the calibration. Any other
combination needs its own calibration and color map file. Use the
name of the color map file to include more information, e.g.
cmyk-glossypaper.dat.<br></li>
</ul>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Results (my Canon
printer)</span><br>
<small><small><small><small><small>&nbsp;
&nbsp;&nbsp;</small></small></small></small></small><br>
<table style="text-align: left;" height="319" width="863" border=
"0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><img style=
"width: 400px; height: 303px;" alt="" src=
"images/printer-calibrate.jpg" hspace="5" align="left">A standard
color chart was scanned and printed on photo paper. The left print
had no adjustments. The right print was adjusted. This image has
all three charts in one photo. The printer did a fairly good job by
itself, but the adjusted print is slightly better. Some colors are
more accurate. Others are little changed.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<img style="width: 266px; height: 138px;" alt="" src=
"images/printer-cal-study.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
&nbsp;<br>
You may be able to find a real <a href=
"https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ICC_profile">ICC color profile</a>
for your printer and its proprietary inks and photo paper. Using
this would most likely produce better results. Check the
installation CD supplied with your printer, and also the
manufacturer's web site. There are also professional services to
generate an ICC color profile. The procedure is similar to the one
described above: you print a color chart supplied by the service,
send the printed chart back to them (along with some money), and
receive an ICC profile, a file which you can install. Try a web
search for "icc profile service".<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>
<a name="set_desktop" id="set_desktop"></a>&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Set Desktop Wallpaper</span>
<big><small>(File View &gt; Tools &gt; Set Desktop
Wallpaper)</small></big><br>
The desktop wallpaper image is set from the current Fotoxx image
file. No inputs are required.<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Note:</span> this
function works only for the Gnome window manager (including
Ubuntu). Other window managers will not work. Also, the currently
selected desktop background must be an image, not a color or
gradient.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="cycle_desktop" id="cycle_desktop"></a>&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Cycle Desktop Wallpaper</span>
<big><small><big><small>(File View &gt; Tools &gt;</small></big>
Cycle Desktop Wallpaper)</small></big> (Gnome only)<br>
The desktop wallpaper image is changed at regular intervals, using
a Fotoxx album as the list of images to show. Fotoxx runs in the
background without a window or GUI interface. It has no effect on
normal interactive use of Fotoxx.<br>
<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">How to cycle the desktop
wallpaper</span>:<br>
<small><small><small><small><small>&nbsp;<br></small></small></small></small></small>
&nbsp; o&nbsp; Create an alternative name for the fotoxx executable
(e.g. fotoxx-wallpaper):<br>
&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; <span style=
"font-family: Liberation Mono;">$ sudo link /usr/bin/fotoxx
/usr/bin/fotoxx-wallpaper</span>&nbsp;<br>
&nbsp; o&nbsp; Start&nbsp; fotoxx-wallpaper, passing the album name
and the time interval in seconds:<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; <span style=
"font-family: Liberation Mono;">$ nohup fotoxx-wallpaper
-cycledesktop albumName seconds &gt;/dev/null &amp;</span><br>
&nbsp; o&nbsp; To stop the background process:&nbsp; <span style=
"font-family: Liberation Mono;">$ pkill fotoxx-wallpaper</span><br>
<br>
Seconds must be at least 10 and there is no upper limit. The nohup
command runs the command detached from the terminal, so that the
terminal can be closed without killing the process. The character
'&amp;' is added after a command to make it run in the background
without blocking the terminal or shell script from which it was
started.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
To start the process after a new logon, put the following command
into your startup list:&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; <span style=
"font-family: Liberation Mono;">fotoxx-wallpaper -cycledesktop
albumName 3600 &amp;</span><br>
This example changes the desktop wallpaper image every hour.<br>
To change the wallpaper only for each new login, use a huge time
value.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Note</span>: this
function works only for Gnome and Ubuntu.<br>
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="resources" id=
"resources"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Resources</span> <big><small>(File
View &gt; Tools &gt; Resources)</small></big><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
This is a diagnostic tool to monitor resources, especially memory
leaks.<br>
The following data is output to the log file (or terminal
window):<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; process time: CPU time used, since the last time
shown<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; zdialog counts: total dialogs in memory and
those still active (visible)<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; zmalloc counts: memory allocations and releases
since the last time shown here<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; MB: total allocated memory at this time in
megabytes<br>
&nbsp;<br>
&nbsp;<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="help_menu" id=
"help_menu"></a>&nbsp;<br>
<img style="width: 40px; height: 40px;" alt="" src=
"images/help.png" vspace="5"><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<big><span style="font-weight: bold;">Help Menu</span></big> (File
View &gt; Help&nbsp; and&nbsp; Gallery View &gt; Help)<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Quick
Guide</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
This is a 1-page introductory document with Fotoxx
essentials.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">User Guide&nbsp; (key
F1)</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
The user guide (this document) is displayed (created using the
WYSIWYG HTML editor Kompozer).<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">User Guide
Changes</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
This is a summary of recent changes in the User Guide. The intent
is to enable you to survey the changes without reading the whole
document.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Edit Functions
Summary</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
A one-page "quick reference" summary of the image edit functions is
displayed.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">README</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
Displays the README file distributed with Fotoxx, which may contain
new information about installation or dependencies. When you
install a new release of Fotoxx, you should look at README and the
Change Log to check if there is anything special you need to be
aware of.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Change
Log</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Displays the change log file distributed with Fotoxx, containing
details about functional changes, additions, or bug fixes for the
current and previous releases.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Translations</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
Displays a short text file which explains how to make a new
translation or change an existing one.<br>
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Home
Page</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Shows the Fotoxx home page from the Internet. Look here for program
updates (the page named "recent changes"). This page is published
via RSS and you can subscribe to get timely notification of
changes.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">About</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
This displays a short message about the Fotoxx version number,
license, credits, and contact address.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>
&nbsp;<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<big style="font-weight: bold;"><a name="gallery_view_menus" id=
"gallery_view_menus"></a></big>&nbsp;<br>
<big style="font-weight: bold;"><img style=
"width: 41px; height: 41px;" alt="" src="images/viewG.png"><br>
Gallery View</big><br>
&nbsp;<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Image Management in
Fotoxx</span><br>
<img style="width: 533px; height: 404px;" alt="" src=
"images/image%20management.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5">&nbsp;<br>
A gallery of thumbnails can represent a file directory, the output
of an image search function, one of the built-in galleries (recent
files, newest files), or an album (an ordered list of files with a
user-given name). <a href="#batch_convert">Batch Convert</a> can
accept files selected from any gallery and output converted files
into a directory. The image cache is a holding area for
user-selected files that can be later added to an album. Manage
Albums (below) can create new albums from a gallery or the image
cache, or select images from galleries and add them to the image
cache.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="gallery_menu" id="albums_menu"></a><br>
<img style="width: 40px; height: 40px;" alt="" src=
"images/folder.png" height="60" vspace="5" width="64"><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<big><span style="font-weight: bold;">Gallery Menu</span>
<small>(Gallery View &gt; Menu)</small></big><br>
&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Sync Gallery</span> (Gallery View
&gt; Menu &gt; Sync Gallery)<br>
This is a duplicate of the <a href="#sync_gallery">Sync Gallery</a>
function in File View.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="export_images"></a><br>
<b>Export Image Files</b> <big><small>(Gallery View &gt; Menu &gt;
Export)</small></big><br>
<img alt="" src="images/export-files.jpg" height="145" hspace="5"
vspace="5" width="360"><br>
<big><small>This function copies selected image files into another
directory. This would be typically used for copying files to a
thumb drive, reorganizing your directories, preparation for an
internet file transfer, etc. Select any number of image files by
clicking gallery thumbnails (<a href=
"#gallery_selection">link</a>). Select a directory where the image
files will be copied.<br></small></big> &nbsp;<br>
<a name="flickr_upload"></a><br>
<b>Upload to Flickr</b>&nbsp; (Gallery View &gt; Menu &gt; Upload
to Flickr)<br>
Select any number of image files by clicking gallery thumbnails.
These can then be uploaded to your Flickr "camera roll". In Flickr
itself, you can move the images into a Flickr album or perform
other functions offered by Flickr.<br>
<br>
Before uploading, you must create a Flickr account (if not already)
and prepare authorization data to enable batch uploads. This is a
one-time setup. Perform the following steps:<br>
<ol>
<li>Install the package flickcurl-utilities from your
repository.<br></li>
<li>Go to&nbsp; <big><tt>www.flickr.com</tt></big>&nbsp; and set up
a Flickr account. You will be asked to create a Yahoo login first,
and then a flickr account name.</li>
<li>Go to&nbsp;
<big><tt>www.flickr.com/services/api/keys/</tt></big>&nbsp; and
request a <u>client key</u> and <u>client secret</u>. These are
long text strings that connect the upload process to your Flickr
account.<br></li>
<li>Create the file&nbsp;
<big><tt>/home/&lt;user&gt;/.flickcurl.conf</tt></big>&nbsp; in
this exact format:<br>
<big><tt>&nbsp;&nbsp; [flickr]</tt><tt><br></tt> <tt>&nbsp;&nbsp;
oauth_client_key=<u>client key</u></tt><tt><br></tt>
<tt>&nbsp;&nbsp; oauth_client_secret=<u>client
secret</u></tt><tt><br></tt></big> There should be no blanks in
these 3 lines.<br></li>
<li>Execute the following shell command:<br>
<big><tt>&nbsp;&nbsp;</tt> <tt>$ flickcurl
oauth.create<br></tt></big> This command returns 3 strings:
<u>request token</u>, <u>request token secret</u>, and
<u>authentication URL</u>.</li>
<li>Go to <u>authentication URL</u> (a web address), approve the
request, and get a <u>verifier</u> (another text string).<br>
(this may take a long time, be patient)</li>
<li>Execute the following shell command:<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; <big><tt>$ flickcurl oauth.verify&nbsp;
<u>request token</u>&nbsp; <u>request token secret</u>&nbsp;
<u>verifier</u></tt></big><br>
This sets up the final .flickcurl.conf as follows:<br>
<big><tt>&nbsp;&nbsp; [flickr]</tt><tt><br></tt> <tt>&nbsp;&nbsp;
oauth_token=<u>request token</u></tt><tt><br></tt> <tt>&nbsp;&nbsp;
oauth_token_secret=<u>request token secret</u></tt><tt><br></tt>
<tt>&nbsp;&nbsp; oauth_client_key=</tt><tt><u>client
key</u></tt><tt><br></tt> <tt>&nbsp;&nbsp;
oauth_client_secret=</tt><tt><u>client secret</u><br></tt></big>
Again, insure there are no blanks.<big><tt><br></tt></big></li>
</ol>
(I have no idea why it is this complicated. It seems one unique key
would be just as good as four.)<br>
<small><small><small>&nbsp;&nbsp;<br></small></small></small>
<img alt="" src="images/flickr-upload.jpg" height="328" hspace="5"
vspace="5" width="300" align="left"><br>
Fotoxx should now be able to upload files.<br>
First select thumbnails in the usual manner (<a href=
"#gallery_selection">link</a>).<br>
When done, press [proceed] to begin the upload process.<br>
<br>
The following metadata items are captured automatically:<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp; caption, city, country, tags (keywords), rating.<br>
<br>
This function does not block, so you can continue to use<br>
other functions in Fotoxx. Keep the dialog open until done.<br>
<br clear="all">
&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="manage_albums" id=
"manage_albums"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Manage Albums</span>
<big><small>(Gallery View &gt; Menu &gt; Manage
Albums)</small></big><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
An album is an arbitrary sequence of images that is manually
assembled from existing images. This is one method to make groups
of associated images. An album is simply a list of its member image
files. The image files themselves are not copied or changed. A
given image file can be a member of multiple albums, or may be
present more than once within an album. Albums can be used to group
images with some shared attributes, such as photos from a vacation
trip, photos of a given person taken at different times or events,
a "best photos" collection, etc. You can add and remove images in
an album and rearrange the order of the images. Once an album is
made, you can call it up by name and it becomes a gallery. This
gallery works like any other: you can scroll through the gallery,
step through the images with the [Prev/Next] button, or edit the
images. Keep in mind that editing an image in an album will edit
the underlying image file, so any other way to view this image will
show the same changes.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Image
Cache</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
This is an intermediate storage area used to hold selected images
for later insertion into an album. In general, you select image
files from gallery windows and add them to the cache, then you make
a new album with images from the cache, or you add the cached
images to an existing album at a chosen position within the
album.<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<table style="text-align: left;" height="610" width="867" border=
"0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Manage Albums Dialog</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 272px; height: 354px;" alt="" src=
"images/albums1.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5" align=
"left"><span style="text-decoration: underline;"><br>
New</span>: Start a new album or replace an existing one. The
dialog shown immediately below is started.<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Choose</span>: Choose an
album to view or edit. The gallery window will show the album
current images. Use the thumbnail popup menu (below) to add or
remove images.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Add:</span> Add images to
the image cache using the standard dialog for selecting images from
gallery windows (<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href=
"#gallery_selection">link</a>). Select image files in any order
from any gallery. Selected images are added to the image cache. Add
cached images to the album using the popup menu (below).<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Remove</span>: The
standard dialog for selecting images is started. Choose images from
the current album gallery to be removed. The images are left in the
image cache in case you want to insert them into another gallery or
a different place in the same gallery.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Clear</span>: Discard all
images in the image cache.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Delete</span>: Select an
album to delete. Image files are not deleted.<br clear="all">
&nbsp;<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">New Album
dialog</span><br>
<img style="width: 316px; height: 175px;" alt="" src=
"images/albums2.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5" align="left"><br>
Specify an album name, or use the [browse] button to select an
existing album to be replaced. Select one of the three options.
Option 1 creates the album with no images. Option 2 fills the album
from cached images, if any. Option 3 creates the album from the
current gallery. This may be a directory, the output of an image
search, or an album.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;" clear=
"all"></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Right-click Popup
Menu</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 556px; height: 357px;" alt="" src=
"images/albums3.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>
<small><small><small>&nbsp;<br></small></small></small>
<table style="text-align: left;" height="191" width="800" border=
"1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Copy to Image
Cache<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Add the clicked image to
the image cache.</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Cut to Image
Cache<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Remove the image from the
album and add it to the image cache.</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Copy to
Clipboard<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Copy the image to the
clipboard (for other apps to paste).<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>Paste
Image Cache Here (keep)&nbsp;<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Insert all cached images at
the clicked position. Click roughly between two thumbnails where
the images will be inserted.</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>Paste
Image Cache Here (clear)&nbsp;<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Same as above, but the
cache is cleared.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Paste Current Image File
Here<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Inserts the current image
file at the clicked position.</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Remove from
Album<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Remove the clicked image
from the album</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Popup
Image<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Pop-up a large resizeable
window for the image. Replace previous popup
window.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>View
Metadata<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Metadata short report for
clicked image file.<br></small></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Drag and Drop</span><br>
You can rearrange images within an album by dragging thumbnails
with the mouse. Drag the thumbnail until the mouse cursor changes
to a small image of the thumbnail. Continue dragging this image to
the position where it should be inserted, and release the mouse
button. Position the mouse roughly between the images where the
dragged image is to be inserted. If the drag approaches the top or
bottom edge of the window, the gallery will scroll to bring more
images into view. You can use two instances of Fotoxx to make the
selection or movement of many images faster. Drag and drop images
from any gallery on to an album gallery. The source gallery can
also be an album or the results from an image search function. The
image cache is also a gallery which can be used as a source, but
not a destination.<br>
<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Summary</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<ul style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<li>Make a new album: Use the [New] button and provide a
name.<br></li>
<li>Add images to an existing album: Use the [Choose] button and
select an album. Use the [Add] button to select images from any
gallery. After closing this dialog, the gallery reverts to the
chosen album. Right-click an album thumbnail and select one of the
Paste menus to insert the selected images. You can also choose
another album and insert the same images, if you did not clear the
cache.<br></li>
<li>Remove images from an album: Right-click each thumbnail, then
select the Remove menu.</li>
<li>Move images within an album: Use the Cut or Copy menu and the
Paste menu to move multiple images. To move one image at a time
within a single album, you can use mouse drag and drop.</li>
<li>Drag and drop can be used with two instances of Fotoxx to move
images from any gallery in one instance to an album gallery in the
other instance.<br></li>
</ul>
<u>TIP</u>: If image files are renamed or moved using Batch
Convert, and if deletion of the original image files was also
specified, then all albums containing any of the input files are
updated to reflect the new names and locations. Therefore, don't
just rename directories if they contain images in albums, or
manually move image files among directories. Instead, use Batch
Convert to move the image files to the new directory, then delete
the old directory if it is left empty.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="update_albums"></a><br>
<b>Update Albums</b> <big><small>(Gallery View &gt; Menu &gt;
Update Albums)<br>
<img alt="" src="images/update-albums.jpg" height="117" hspace="5"
vspace="5" width="228"><br>
Update the image files in selected albums with the latest file
versions. If image files are edited and new versions created,
albums will still reference the prior versions. This function
checks album files for later versions and replaces the album files
(links) where needed. You can select any number of albums for
processing.</small></big> <big><small>No files are deleted or
moved. The file names (or links) within albums are updated.<br>
&nbsp;<br></small></big> <a name="replace_album_file"></a><br>
<b>Replace Album File</b> <big><small>(Gallery View &gt; Menu &gt;
Replace Album File)<br>
<img alt="" src="images/replace-album-file.jpg" height="195"
hspace="5" vspace="5" width="500"><br></small></big> Replace an
image file in selected albums with another image file. If an image
file is edited and a new version or new file is created, albums
referencing the old file may need updating. Choose any number of
albums and specify the old file name and the new file (replacement)
name. No files are deleted or moved. The file names (or links)
within albums are updated.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="slide_show" id=
"slide_show"></a>&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Slide Show</span>
<big><small>(Gallery View &gt; Menu &gt; Slide
Show)</small></big><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
With this function you can show a pre-selected sequence of images
in full-screen mode.<br>
There are three dialogs used to define and customize a slide
show.<br>
<img style="width: 733px; height: 938px;" alt="" src=
"images/slide-show.jpg" vspace="5"><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
Use the <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href=
"#manage_albums">Manage Albums</a> function to assemble the images
for a slide show as an album with an assigned name. This allows you
to collect images from anywhere in your image database and order
them as desired. In the slide show dialog, press [Select] and
choose an album from the list provided. Press the Proceed button to
start the slide show with the first image (or the current image, if
a member of the slide show album). Use the escape key or F11 to
exit the slide show and return to the dialog.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<br>
The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">spacebar</span> can
be used to pause and resume between slides. The <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">B-key</span> can be used to blank the
screen and pause the show. Press again to restore the current
image, or press the spacebar to resume with the next image. You can
use the left and right <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">arrow keys</span> to go back and
forth within the sequence of images. You can interrupt the slide
show by pressing the <span style="text-decoration: underline;">ESC
key</span> for a gallery view. Click on a thumbnail image, and this
will be the next image to show. This allows you to skip around more
easily than stopping and starting the show each time. The
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">M-key</span> can be used
(whenever the slide show is paused) to start the magnify function
to view selected parts of the image at higher size. The
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">N-key</span> can be used
to bypass the normal image display time and go immediately to the
next image. The arrow keys bypass the animated transition to show
the previous or next image immediately. The N-key keeps the normal
transition and shows the next image. Press <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">KB Shortcuts</span> for a popup list
of all the keyboard functions.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br>
Dialog Controls:<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Seconds</span>: The
standard time each image is shown.<br>
This time can be extended for selected images in the <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Images Preferences</span> dialog
(below).<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Clip Limit</span>: Images
are scaled to fit the window. If the image and window aspect ratios
are different, this will create black margins above and below or
left and right of the image. You can optionally make the images
expand to fill these margins and cut off the opposite sides of the
image (e.g. if the margins are on the left and right, the image is
expanded to fill these margins and cut off the top and bottom
equally). You control how much of this is allowed with the Clip
Limit, which is the percent difference in aspect ratios above which
expansion and clipping will not be done. Zero means no clipping is
done, 10% means that images with 10% or less difference in aspect
ratio will be expanded and clipped.<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Music File</span>: An
optional music file or playlist that will start when the slide show
is started.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Full Screen</span>: If
checked, images are shown full-screen without menu, title bar,
etc.<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Auto-replay</span>: if
checked, the slide show will start over after reaching the end.<br>
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Press [transitions] to start a dialog to select and customize the
transitions between images. These include instant replacement,
fade-out / fade-in, and many animated methods of image replacement
(e.g. the new image expands from the center to replace the old
image). Select the transitions to be used and whether they are used
randomly or in sequence. The slowdown parameters can be used to
slow transitions that may operate too fast on some PCs (some may be
too slow on slow PCs, but this cannot be helped). The preference
parameters specify a relative preference which will influence how
frequently the transition type is used when a random sequence is
selected.<br>
<br>
The buttons [load] and [save] allow you to save transition settings
in a file and load them later. These files are independent of the
slide show files. A slide show will default to the transition
settings last used for that slide show, but you can always override
these by using the [load] button to load some other
settings.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Press [image files] to start a dialog for image preferences. These
are optional. An image is selected for customizing by clicking its
thumbnail (press the [gallery] button or G-key to show thumbnails).
The dialog is filled-in with default settings or the previous
settings for this image. Enter revisions and press [done], or click
on the next image to be customized. If <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Play Tone</span> is selected, a tone
is played when the image appears during the slide show. The
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Show Caption / Show
Comments</span> times determine how long the image caption and
comments will be shown above the image. After this time they
disappear. Captions and comments are edited with <a href=
"#edit_metadata">Edit Metadata</a>. The <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Wait times</span> determine how long
the image will wait before and after the optional zoom, until
moving on to the next image. These are always used, even if there
is no zoom. <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Zoom
type</span> selects zoom-in (image approaches) or zoom-out (image
recedes). <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Zoom
size</span> controls how much the image will be zoomed and
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Steps</span> determines
how many steps are made during the zoom. 1.0 means no zoom, and 3.0
is the maximum zoom (image is 3x larger). Use at least 300 steps
for a smooth zoom, and more than this if you want it to zoom more
slowly. To set the center of the zoom, press the [<span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Zoom Center</span>] button first,
then click on the thumbnail image at the desired zoom center.
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Transition</span> is used
to select a transition type to be used from this image to the next
image. If transition type "next" is selected, then the normal
transition sequence is used, as specified in the Transitions
dialog.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
Sequence of slide show events for each image:<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; play the tone if specified<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; show the caption and comments for the specified
times (may be zero)<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; wait for the first interval (may be zero)<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; perform the zoom (if the zoom size is &gt; 1)<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; wait for the 2nd interval (may be zero)<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; wait for the standard interval specified in the
Slide Show dialog<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; do the transition to the next image<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="bookmarks" id=
"bookmarks"></a><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Bookmarks</span>&nbsp;
<big><small>(Gallery View &gt; Bookmarks)</small></big><br>
<img style="width: 612px; height: 276px;" alt="" src=
"images/bookmarks1.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>
<img style="width: 626px; height: 349px;" alt="" src=
"images/bookmarks2.jpg" hspace="5" vspace="5"><br>
Assign names ("bookmarks") to chosen gallery locations (directory
and image file), keep in a list, and use the list to select a name
and go instantly to the associated gallery position. There are two
parts: an edit dialog to build the list of bookmarks, and a [GoTo]
button in the gallery view to show the bookmarks and select a
location to go to. To assign new bookmarks, press the [GoTo] button
and then select [Edit Bookmarks] in the dialog that follows. The
Edit Bookmarks dialog is started. Click on a gallery thumbnail to
add this location to the bookmark list. The assigned bookmark name
will default to the file name. This name appears in an edit field
where you can assign a better name. If you select an existing
bookmark with a mouse click, its name is shown in the input field.
You can change the name or press [delete] to remove the bookmark.
New bookmarks are inserted at the last bookmark location selected.
To go to a bookmark, press the [GoTo] button. The list of bookmarks
is shown. Click on an entry to go there.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="gallery_view_buttons" id="gallery_view_buttons"></a>
<a name="sort_gallery" id="sort_gallery"></a>&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Gallery View
Buttons</span>&nbsp;<br>
<table style="text-align: left;" height="158" width="841" border=
"1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><img style=
"width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt="" src=
"images/zoom+.png"><img style="width: 32px; height: 32px;" alt=""
src="images/zoom-.png"></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><span style=
"font-weight: bold;">Zoom-in / zoom-out.</span> Increase or
decreast the gallery thumbnail size.<br>
If decreased to zero, the gallery becomes a simple list of file
names.<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 40px; height: 40px;" alt="" src="images/sort.png" vspace=
"5"></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><span style=
"font-weight: bold;">Sort</span> the gallery thumbnails in an
alternative sequence. You can sort by file name (default), Photo
date/time (from EXIF data), or file modification date/time (file
creation or last modification date/time). The sequence may be
ascending or descending.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><img style=
"width: 24px; height: 24px;" alt="" src=
"images/top.png"><img style="width: 24px; height: 24px;" alt=""
src="images/bottom.png"><br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">Jump to the beginning or end of
the gallery.<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><img style=
"width: 24px; height: 24px;" alt="" src="images/up.png"><img style=
"width: 24px; height: 24px;" alt="" src="images/down.png"></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">Scroll back (up) or forward (down)
by one gallery page.<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"><img style=
"width: 37px; height: 37px;" alt="" src="images/scroll.png"></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">Slow scroll the gallery. Can be
used to visually scan for a desired image file.<br>
Press the button again to stop the scroll, or press any other
button.<br></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
&nbsp;<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<b>The <a href="#batch_menu">Batch</a>, <a href=
"#tools_menu">Tools</a>, and <a href="#help_menu">Help</a> menus
are duplicated here in Gallery View.</b><b><br></b> &nbsp;<br>
&nbsp;<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;"><a name="world_map_menus" id=
"world_map_menus"></a></span>&nbsp;<br>
<img style="width: 40px; height: 40px;" alt="" src=
"images/viewW.png" hspace="0" vspace="5" align="left"> <span style=
"font-weight: bold;"><br>
<br>
<br>
World Map Menus</span><br>
The World Maps functions use locally stored map files which can be
downloaded as explained below. You can also install custom maps and
use them like any other map.<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">&nbsp;&nbsp;<br></span>
<span style="font-weight: bold;"><a name="images_by_map" id=
"images_by_map"></a></span> <span style="font-weight: bold;"><br>
Images by Map Location<br>
<img style="width: 800px; height: 249px;" alt="" src=
"images/map-click.jpg" vspace="5"></span><br>
If the separate package <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">fotoxx-maps</span> is installed, a
set of geographic maps is available for Fotoxx. These are a world
map and maps of each continent. Click the left side menu bar World
Maps button to change to world map view mode. A world map is shown
at first. Click on any area to get a much larger view of that area.
The map image can then be panned and scrolled to any other area by
dragging the mouse. Map markers (red dots) show locations having
corresponding geotagged images. Click on a marker to get a gallery
of images from that location. The window changes to the gallery
view and the gallery appears. Press the world maps button and click
a new location for a new gallery report.<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;"><br>
Map Navigation</span>: zoom and pan / scroll for a map is slightly
different from image files:<br>
&nbsp; +&nbsp; mouse wheel forward: zoom the map to full size,
centered on the mouse position<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; mouse wheel backward: shrink the map to fit within
the window<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; left click on a marker: show gallery of images
geotagged for that marked location<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; left click NOT on a marker: zoom the map to full
size, centered on the clicked position<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; right click: shrink the map to fit within the
window<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; keyboard Z key: alternate between full size and
shrink to fit<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp; +&nbsp; mouse drag: the zoomed map image pans and scrolls
like other images<br>
<br>
When in world map mode, menus are available for choosing a new map
and for searching images.<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">&nbsp;<br>
<a name="choose_map" id="choose_map"></a></span><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Choose Map<br>
<img alt="" src="images/choosemap.png" height="48" hspace="5"
vspace="5" width="48"><br></span> Choose Map allows you to choose
any available map. All maps will show markers (red dots) where
there are geotagged images. Click on a marker to get a gallery view
of all the images at this location. The range of images selected
corresponds to the marker size: images located within the marker
area on the map are selected.<br>
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Installing Custom Map
Files</span><br style="font-weight: bold;">
Obtain the map from any suitable source, e.g. Google Maps or Open
Street Map. You need to get the map as a JPEG or PNG file. You can
use a screen capture function with Google Maps or OpenStreetMap.
You can use the Fotoxx Mashup tool to stitch many maps together to
make a huge map (e.g. 100 megapixels). These work well with Fotoxx
pan and zoom. You can also use a scanner to capture one or more
paper maps and accurately stitch them together with Mashup.<br>
<br>
To install a map, put the map file into the directory <span style=
"font-family: Liberation Mono;">/home/&lt;user&gt;/.fotoxx/user_maps</span>.
In this directory you will also need a text file: <span style=
"font-family: Liberation Mono;">maps_index</span>. Each map
requires a line in this file which specifies the map file name and
the latitude-longitude range of the map. Here is an example
maps_index file:<br>
<table style=
"text-align: left; width: 556px; height: 19px; font-family: Liberation Mono;"
border="0" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">&nbsp;&nbsp; Hamburg.jpg,&nbsp;
53.455,&nbsp; 53.553, &nbsp; 9.906,&nbsp; 10.067<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp; Houston.jpg,&nbsp; 29.479,&nbsp; 30.053, -95.786,
-94.905</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
The entries are map file name, low and high latitude, low and high
longitude. All values are degrees, separated by commas. Spacing
does not matter. Fotoxx assumes a Mercator projection, but this is
not significant for maps covering less than 100 km (e.g. city
maps).<br>
<br>
If you make a custom map, getting accurate latitude and longitude
values for the map edges can be tricky. Use the Open Street Map
"export" option to view maps with an overlay rectangle labeled with
latitude and longitude. Adjust the rectangle to match a corner of a
map you have created and record the latitude and longitude values.
You need accurate latitude and longitude data for the upper left
and lower right corners of the completed map. The precision should
be suitable for the scale of the map. 1 degree of latitude
corresponds to about 110 km on the earth's surface. 0.001 degree
corresponds to 110 meters.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="OSM_map_menus" id="OSM_map_menus"></a>&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;"><img style=
"width: 41px; height: 41px;" alt="" src="images/viewM.png" vspace=
"5"><br>
OSM Map Menus</span><br>
The OSM Map functions use an internet service to provide maps from
any location at any scale. The OSM maps offers superior
functionality, but depend on having a fast and reliable internet
connection. Markers (red dots) will show the locations for any of
your images with geotags. Use the mouse wheel or double-clicks to
zoom-in on any location. Drag the map to change the center. Click
on a marker to get a gallery view of the images at this location.
The range of images selected corresponds to the marker size: images
located within the marker area on the map are selected. The marker
area varies with the map scale. Nearby markers on a large map will
consolidate when the map is scaled back (zoomed out), and clicking
the consolidated marker will get all the images of the contained
markers.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="OSM_map_source" id="map_source"></a><br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">OSM Map Source<br>
<img alt="" src="images/choosemap.png" height="48" hspace="5"
vspace="5" width="48"><br></span> At this time, two internet map
sources are supported: Mapnik and Mapbox. The default is Mapnik. It
is entirely open and free and works quite well if your internet
connection is good. The one drawback is that location names are in
the language script of the location (e.g. Arabic, Chinese ...), so
for Westerners these maps are only useful for Western countries
using Latin script. Mapbox uses Latin script for all major location
names. Mapbox, however, requires an access key, which you must
request. These are free for modest usage: up to 50,000 "map tiles"
per month, which is adequate for most purposes. To use Mapbox, go
to the Mapbox web site, developers page, and follow the
instructions. In Fotoxx, use the OSM Map Source menu function and
select mapbox. You must input your access key the first time
only.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
&nbsp;<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="other_topics" id="other_topics"></a><br>
<big style="font-weight: bold;">Other Topics<br>
&nbsp;<br></big> <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name=
"organizing_images" id="organizing_images"></a>&nbsp;<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<big><span style="font-weight: bold;">Organizing Images for
Efficient Searching&nbsp;</span></big><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<small><small><small>&nbsp;</small></small></small><br>
Relevant links: <a href="#edit_metadata">Edit Metadata</a>,
<a href="#batch_tags">Batch Add/Remove Tags</a>, <a href=
"#batch_rename_tags">Batch Rename Tags</a>, <a href=
"#batch_add_geotags">Batch Add Geotags</a>,&nbsp; <a href=
"#batch_convert">Batch Convert</a>, <a href="#search_images">Search
Images</a>, <a href="#image_locations">Image Locations</a>,
<a href="#images_by_map">Images by Map Location</a>, <a href=
"#index_files">Index Image Files</a>, <a href=
"#manage_albums">Magage Albums</a>, <a href="#slide_show">Slide
Show</a>.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
The goal is to find all images for given criteria, e.g. photos of a
given person at a given place and time range, all photos of a given
person, photos from a specified location or event, etc. There are
several ways to organize an image collection to accomplish this,
with advantages and disadvantages you need to understand. These
methods may be used in any combination. Keep in mind that if you
also want to use other programs for searching images, you need to
pay attention to which methods are compatible. The methods listed
here (except for albums) are standards compliant and will work with
other programs that support the same methods. These are (1)
searching based on metadata, especially tags (keywords), and (2)
searching based on file names or partial names, including directory
(path) names.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Fotoxx can search using the following image metadata: photo date,
rating (stars), tags (keywords), geotags (location names and earth
coordinates), and text appearing in captions or comments. Searching
based on file and directory names can also be combined with
metadata searching. In addition, any metadata can be searched,
although not nearly as fast as the items listed, which are
duplicated in a special index file for fast searching. A strong
computer can search the listed metadata items and file names at a
speed exceeding 10,000 images per second.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br>
The following is an overview of the options and
tradeoffs.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Physical
Organization</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Directory and file names can be used as a basic organization that
will enable you to find images even if more effective organizations
(tags, albums, captions) are not used. The highest physical
organization should be by time, because this will naturally group
photos together that were made for an event, travel location, etc.
I suggest using one subdirectory per year named 2001, 2002, etc.
This will also prevent any one subdirectory from getting too big.
Optionally, image files may be further organized in time sequence
by using MM.DD as the start of the file name. The rest of the name
can be a topic or event, and a sequence number.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Example:&nbsp; <span style=
"font-family: Liberation Mono;">/images/2011/08.20 Spitzbergen
23</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
This very basic organization allows Fotoxx to find files by
searching file names. In the above example, a search for
"spitzbergen" or even "spitz" will produce all the images of
Spitzbergen. The Batch Convert function lets you rename a whole
batch of photos taken at one location or event by selecting the
files and then specifying a template name like "$mm.$dd Spitzbergen
$ss". Month, day, and sequence numbers automatically replace $mm,
$dd, and $ss.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Captions and
Comments</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
A simple method of organization is to use captions and comments.
These are arbitrary text strings that can be added to a series of
images in rapid sequence: Start Edit Metadata, open an image, input
some text, press [apply], press [next], input some text ...&nbsp;
Captions and comments are two separate inputs but treated logically
the same. They are searchable: words appearing in captions and
comments can be searched. You can specify persons, location, topic,
etc. for each image and then find them again quickly. You can
combine word searches with other criteria such as dates and file
names.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Tags</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
The most powerful tool is tags, but this is also the most demanding
of organizational care. You can go through your images sequentially
and add tags by clicking on a list of defined tags. New tags can be
defined as needed. Images can have many tags, and can be searched
using AND / OR combinations of tags, also in combination with other
criteria. Tagging is generally fast, needing a few seconds per
image. Fotoxx has two methods of adding tags, a "managed" system
and a "random" system. In the managed system, you define tag
category names and the tags within each category. When adding tags
to images, you can point and click from a list of tags organized by
category and alphabetically within category. This list should be
small enough (&lt;500?) to be practical for visually locating tags
to click on. In the random system, you simply create tags as needed
while you tag your images, following no particular system and
without categories. After you have entered the first few characers
of a tag, existing tags that match these characters are shown in a
pick-list which you can click to complete adding the tag. If there
is no match, a new tag is created. In either case, recently used
tags are shown in a list that can be clicked. Photos made at the
same time will normally be tagged in sequence, and will also share
many of the same tags. The recent tags list helps to speed the
tagging process. Use Batch Add/Remove Tags to add the same tags to
a bunch of images. Note that images downloaded from the Internet
may have many tags adhering to no system. You will need to clean
these out or redo them to stop them from cluttering your list of
defined tags. If you see undesired tags in your list of defined
tags, it is easy to find the offending image files and purge or
change their tags: use the Image Search function to find the
images, using the tags as search criteria, and feed this list to
Batch Add/Remove Tags or Batch Rename Tags. The respective dialogs
allow you to specify the tags to remove or rename.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Geotags</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
Use geotags to assign a city or location and country to your
images, and optionally latitude / longitude. This enables all
images for a location to be quickly found (or those near a location
if latitude / longitude is used). If you use a camera with a GPS
receiver and automatic geotagging, then geotags are in the image
EXIF data, and location searching is available automatically. Since
image dates are also automatic (in EXIF), images can be searched by
date range and location without you having to enter any data for
each image. You can leave it at this, or add some of the above
extras if you accept the extra effort required. My experience so
far with city / country via GPS is that the names are chaotic and
you may want to sanitize them (upper/lower case, with/without
states or other political subdivisions, fix mixed languages, etc.).
You can fix the mess with a little effort: search for the location
you want to change (e.g. MUENCHEN), then process the resulting
images with the <span style="font-family: sans-serif;">Batch Add
Geotags</span> function to change the location (e.g.
Munich).<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Albums</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
Another method of organization is to use Albums. Choose a name for
each album and assign any desired images to the album by clicking
thumbnails in gallery pages. The images are not duplicated: the
album is simply an ordered list of file names. This method is
independent of tags, captions, file names, etc. Albums can be
selected by name and viewed as a gallery of thumbnails. These can
be rearranged via thumbnail drag and drop. The images can then be
viewed sequentially using keyboard arrow keys, randomly by clicking
thumbnails, or as a slide show with animated transitions between
images. Albums are also implemented in some other photo management
apps, but each one is different and incompatible.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Summary</span><br style=
"font-weight: bold; font-family: sans-serif;">
The following table summarizes the options. Keep in mind that
searching by date works with any of these methods, and you can
combine the methods any way you wish, e.g. "directory and file
names" together with "captions and comments".<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<table style="text-align: left; font-family: sans-serif;" height=
"545" width="894" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">Method and Example<br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">&nbsp;Advantages<br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">&nbsp;Disadvantages<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;">
<small><span style="text-decoration: underline;">Directory and File
Names</span><br>
e.g. image files like this:<br>
&nbsp; /.../2014/06.25 Rome-12.jpg<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>+ simple and easy to
use<br>
+ fast implementation: batch move and rename<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; files with added dates and sequence numbers<br>
+ gallery overview at each level of hierarchy<br>
+ easy to navigate up / down hierarchy levels<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>+ no overview of available
search terms<br>
+ long file names required for multiple search<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; categories (date, place, persons, events
...)<br>
+ risk inconsistent names, unreliable search<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Captions and Comments</span><br>
e.g. caption or comment like this:<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp; 2014 Italy Rome Forum</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>+ simple and easy to
use<br>
+ flexible search using multiple categories<br>
+ moderately fast implementation:<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; think + write time, per image<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>+ no overview of available
search terms<br>
+ may end up with thousands of categories<br>
+ risk inconsistent names, unreliable search<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Managed Tags</span><br></small>
<small>+ e.g. Rome, Italy, Susan<br></small> <small>+ Point and
click in a tag list<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; to add tags to images<br></small> <small>+ Tags
have categories for faster<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; visual location in the tag list<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>+ good overview of
available tags to click<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; (organized by persons, places, events ...)<br>
+ easy creation of new tags<br>
+ no inconsistent or redundant tags, no typos<br>
+ therefore searching more reliable<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>+ requires careful planning
of tags<br>
+ slow to find and click tags if &gt;500 tags<br>
+ hard to revise tag naming system<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; (batch add / delete / rename is available)<br>
<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Random Tags</span><br>
+ tags with no organizing system<br>
<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>+ no planning needed<br>
+ creating and entering tags is faster<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; (point and click or type-in tags)<br>
+ legacy tags can be kept unchanged<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>+ inconsistent tags
(scenery, landscape)<br>
+ redundant tags (Susan, Susy, Sue)<br>
+ tags with typos (scenery, scenrey)<br>
+ poor overview of existing tags<br>
+ therefore searching less reliable<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;">
<small><span style="text-decoration: underline;">Geotags</span><br>
e.g. location data like this:<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp; Rome Italy 41.89 N 12.48 E</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>+ cameras with GPS store
data automatically<br>
+ manually add locations (few secs. per image)<br>
+ batch add location to many images at once<br>
+ search location by clicking on a map image<br>
+ search location and date-range by clicking<br>
&nbsp; &nbsp; on a report of available locations /
dates<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>+ useful only for searching
by location<br>
+ chaotic location naming by cameras<br>
&nbsp; &nbsp; (revise using search and batch update)</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small><span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">Albums</span><br>
e.g. album names like this:<br>
&nbsp; + best scenery<br>
&nbsp; + Italy 2014<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>+ make ad hoc albums using
any criteria<br>
+ images can be in multiple albums<br>
&nbsp; &nbsp; or multiple times within one album<br>
+ basis for slide show function<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>+ time to locate and add
images to an album<br>
&nbsp; &nbsp; (find and click gallery thumbnails)<br>
+ images not searchable by other categories<br>
+ not usable by other applications<br></small></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
&nbsp;<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="translations" id="translations"></a>&nbsp;<br>
<big style="font-weight: bold;">Translations&nbsp;</big><br>
Translation files for Fotoxx are found here:&nbsp; <span style=
"font-family: Liberation Mono;">/usr/share/fotoxx/locales/translate-xx.po.gz</span><br style="font-family: Liberation Mono;">

The file may or may not be compressed (.gz ending). <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">xx</span> is a standard 2-character
language code (e.g. <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">de</span> for German) or a
combination language and region code (e.g. <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">de_AT</span> for Austrian German).
This code normally corresponds to the locale of the computer, as
shown by the command <span style="text-decoration: underline;">echo
$LANG</span>. If there is no installed translation file for
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">xx</span>, you can use
the dummy translation file for <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">en</span> (English) as a template.
Replace the translations of english to english with english to
new-language, and save the new file with the right <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">xx</span> code. The translation files
are protected and cannot be edited unless you have root privileges.
It is better to copy a translation file to a more convenient
location for editing, and save the edited file in the standard
location when ready to test. Translation files are available for
use immediately - no conversion to a binary format is needed since
the text files are processed directly by Fotoxx. However, it is
advisable to go through the standard GNU translation process to
find possible errors. This is explained below.<br>
<br>
Translation files are commonly called ".po files" and have the file
type ".po" (or ".po.gz" if compressed).<br>
A typical translation in a .po file looks like this:<br>
<span style="font-family: Liberation Mono;">&nbsp; msgid "The file
name is: \n %s"</span><br style="font-family: Liberation Mono;">
<span style="font-family: Liberation Mono;">&nbsp; msgstr "Der
Dateiname ist: \n %s"</span><br style=
"font-family: Liberation Mono;">
<br>
"msgid" is an English text for translation. "msgstr" is the
translation (German in this case). The special codes "%s" and "\n"
are for inserted text and formatting. A file name will be inserted
at "%s", and "\n" starts a new line. In the example above, the
displayed file name will start on a new line. In the translation
(msgstr line), these codes must match the English codes (msgid
line) in both type and sequence.<br>
<br>
A missing translation looks like this:<br>
<span style="font-family: Liberation Mono;">&nbsp; msgid "The file
name is: %s \n"</span><br style="font-family: Liberation Mono;">
<span style="font-family: Liberation Mono;">&nbsp; msgstr
""</span><br style="font-family: Liberation Mono;">
<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Revising an existing
translation</span><br>
<ol>
<li>Edit&nbsp; <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">translate-xx.po</span>&nbsp; to add
or update translations for language "xx".</li>
<li>Replace the original file in <span style=
"font-family: Liberation Mono;">/usr/share/fotoxx/locales/</span></li>
<li>Option: compile the .po file to check for errors:&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-family: Liberation Mono;">&nbsp;$ msgfmt -v
--check-format -o /dev/null translate-xx.po</span></li>
<li>Run Fotoxx and check how the translations look. If the computer
locale is not "xx", start fotoxx in language "xx" with the
command:&nbsp; <span style="font-family: Liberation Mono;">$ fotoxx
-l xx</span></li>
<li>Send the modified .po file to me&nbsp; <span style=
"font-family: Liberation Mono;">[<a href=
"http://kornelix.net/contact/contact.html">contact</a>]</span>&nbsp;
so it can be included in Fotoxx release packages.</li>
</ol>
Step 3 is optional. The usual binary translation files (.mo) that
are output by <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">msgfmt</span> are not needed by
Fotoxx. The translation source files (.po) are read directly by
fotoxx, and changes made to a .po file are effective the next time
Fotoxx is started. Step 3 is useful to find errors (e.g. missing or
non-matching format codes, quote marks, etc.).<br>
<br>
Whenever fotoxx is started from a terminal, missing translations
are listed in the terminal window. There is also a function for
this: Tools &gt; Missing Translations lists missing translations in
a popup window.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Problems with long
translations</span><br>
English can be terse compared to other languages (e.g. "undo" is
"Rückgängig machen" in German), and this can cause a confusing
appearance in the GUI layouts. Therefore try to make dialog labels
and buttons short, and look closely at the resulting GUI
layout.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">User Guide
translation</span><br style="text-decoration: underline;">
The English user guide is normally found here:<br>
<span style="font-family: Liberation Mono;">&nbsp;
/usr/share/fotoxx/data/</span><br style=
"font-family: Liberation Mono;">
The file is a text HTML file, which may be edited with any HTML
editor. This is a large document, so expect a week or more of work
to translate it. In order to reduce the work, you can use a simple
text editor and supply text without images - in this case I will
convert to HTML and supply the images. If you make a new or revised
translation, please send it to me&nbsp; <span style=
"font-family: Liberation Mono;">[<a href=
"http://kornelix.net/contact/contact.html">contact</a></span>]&nbsp;
so it can be included in future releases.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="recent_changes" id=
"recent_changes"></a> &nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<big><span style="font-weight: bold;">Recent
Changes</span></big><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
This section is provided to help you quickly review the changes in
the user guide.<br>
Fotoxx version numbers correspond to year and month of release.<br>
<br>
v.16.11 (this release)<br>
<ul>
<li><a href="#adding_geotags">Adding Geotags</a>: enable multiple
geocoordinates for a given location and country name.<br></li>
<li><a href="#flickr_upload">Flickr Upload</a>: new: upload image
files to the Flickr web service.</li>
<li><a href="#export_images">Export Image Files</a>: new: select
and copy images to another directory for export, upload,
etc.<br></li>
<li><a href="#update_albums">Update Albums</a>: new: update albums
referencing image files that have new versions.<br></li>
<li><a href="#replace_album_file">Replace Album File</a>: new:
update albums referencing image file A with image file B.<br></li>
<li><a href="#drag-drop">Drag and Drop</a>: better functionality
for file drag and drop to Fotoxx F-view or G-view.<br></li>
<li><a href="#view_metadata">View Metadata</a> and <a href=
"#batch_report_metadata">Batch Report Metadata</a> use a GUI to
select report items (was a text file).</li>
<li><a href="#unwarp_closeup">Unwarp Closeup</a>: new: reverse
distortions of a close-up face photo (big nose etc.).<br></li>
</ul>
v.16.10<br>
<ul>
<li><a href="#vignette">Vignette</a>: a section was added on how to
make a vignette with an arbitrary shape.</li>
<li><a href="#search_images">Search Images</a>: the output is
automatically saved in the album Search Results.</li>
<li><a href="#batch_tags">Batch Add / Remove Tags</a>: the user
interface was expanded for better ease of use.</li>
<li><a href="#select_hairy">Select Hairy</a>: the user interface
was improved.<br></li>
</ul>
v.16.09<br>
<ul>
<li><a href="#batch_convert">Batch Convert</a>: output file names
may now contain photo dates taken from EXIF.</li>
<li><a href="#command_line">New</a> <a href="#command_line">command
line parameter</a> -home: multiple image collections, managed
separately.</li>
<li><a href="#index_files">Index Image Files</a>: The image index
file is automatically converted to a new high performance<br>
format with this release. The old index is kept, and can be deleted
when you are satisfied that<br>
all is well. The old files are the ones named <big><span style=
"font-family: monospace;">/home/&lt;user&gt;/.fotoxx/image_index/index_001</span></big>&nbsp;
etc.<br></li>
<li><a href="#user_options">User Options</a>: New parameter
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">image index level</span>.
The index process at startup can be bypassed<br>
when Fotoxx is started by Nautilus or other file manager, making
startup very fast.<br></li>
<li><a href="#user_options">User Options</a>: The option
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">show last version
only</span> has extended functionality.<br></li>
<li><a href="#copyto_desktop">Copy to Desktop</a>: New menu and
popup menu.</li>
<li><a href="#thumbnail_popups">Thumbnail Popups</a>: Expanded user
interface for manipulating thumbnail popup images.</li>
<li><a href="#OSM_map_menus">OSM Map Menus</a>: New capability to
specify an alternative internet map source.<br></li>
</ul>
v.16.08<br>
<ul>
<li><a href="#color_mode">Color Mode</a>: a slider was added to
vary the effect from zero to maximum.</li>
<li><a href="#image_timeline">Image Timeline</a>: new report,
images by month, click month for image gallery.</li>
<li><a href="#manage_albums">Manage Albums</a>: new drag and drop
capabilities.<br></li>
<li><a href="#select_hairy">Select Hairy</a>: improved user
interface.<br></li>
</ul>
v.16.07<br>
<ul>
<li><a href="#search_images">Search Images</a>: more flexibility
for specifying metadata select criteria.<br></li>
<li><a href="#select_area">Select Area</a>: the Finish function was
simplified and the <a href="#find_area_gap">Find Gap</a> function
was added.<br></li>
<li><a href="#select_hairy">Select Hairy</a>: a new function to
select objects with complex boundaries.<br></li>
<li><a href="#user_options">User Options</a>: an option was added
to set the window background color.<br></li>
<li><a href="#manage_albums">Manage Albums</a>: a new capability
was added to use two parallel Fotoxx sessions.<br></li>
</ul>
v.16.06<br>
<ul>
<li>Right-click popup menus for File and Gallery views now include
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Show on OSM
Map</span>.<br>
The view is changed to OSM map, centered on the current image or
clicked thumbnail.<br></li>
<li><a href="#edit_any_metadata">Edit Any Metadata</a>: editing
metadata keys that are not in the pick list was made easier.</li>
<li><a href="#edit_metadata">Edit Metadata</a> and <a href=
"#edit_geotags">Edit Geotags</a> were combined for ease of
use.<br></li>
<li><a href="#adjust_HSL">Adjust HSL</a>: functionality improved
and user guide changed accordingly.<br></li>
<li><a href="#paint_clone">Paint/Clone</a>: functionality improved
and user guide changed accordingly.<br></li>
<li>The functions <a href="#delete_trash">Delete and Trash</a> were
combined and work better from gallery view.<br></li>
<li>The functions <a href="#copy_move">Copy and Move</a> were
combined and work better from gallery view.<br></li>
<li><a href="#unbend_image">Unbend</a> was made more intuitive by
the use of images in the dialog box.<br></li>
<li><a href="#search_images">Search Images</a>: search for matching
locations was simplified.</li>
<li><a href="#search_images">Search Images</a>: search for missing
data (location, tags ...) is easier.<br></li>
</ul>
v.16.05<br>
<ul>
<li>A new and better method for mapping image locations was added:
<a href="#world_map_menus">OSM map view</a>.</li>
<li>Warp &gt; <a href="#selective_rescale">Selective Rescale</a>:
new image warping function.</li>
<li>The KB shortcut key for Magnify Image is now <span style=
"font-weight: bold;">X</span> instead of <span style=
"font-weight: bold;">M</span>.<br>
(M was taken for OSM map view).<br></li>
</ul>
v.16.04<br>
<ul>
<li>A new method, median difference, was added to <a href=
"#sharpen_image">Sharpen Image</a>.<br></li>
</ul>
v.16.03<br>
<ul>
<li>Effects &gt; <a href="#blur_background">Blur Background</a>:
new function for background blurring and "Tilt-Shift"
effect.<br></li>
<li><a href="#edit_metadata">Edit Metadata</a>: process a series of
images faster with a button to recall previous data.</li>
<li><a href="#add_transparency">Add Transparency</a>: add
transparency proportional to brightness or selected color.</li>
<li><a href="#calibrate_printer">Calibrate Printer</a>: the color
chart and the procedure were improved. You must perform<br>
the calibration again if you want to print with calibrated colors
(my apologies for this).<br></li>
</ul>
v.16.02<br>
<ul>
<li><a href="#burn_DVD">Burn Images to CD/DVD/BRD</a>: the burn
utility and user procedure was changed.</li>
<li><a href="#paint_clone">Paint/Clone</a>: the capability to paint
over transparent image areas was added.</li>
<li><a href="#cartoon">Effects &gt; Cartoon</a>: new function to
convert a photo into a cartoon-like drawing.</li>
<li><span style="text-decoration: underline;"><a href=
"#keyboard_shortcuts">Function key changes</a>:</span> F10 toggles
full screen mode with menus, F11 without menus.<br></li>
<li><a href="#batch_convert">Batch Convert:</a> overlay image size
can be made constant regardless of image dimensions.</li>
<li><a href="#image_list">Image File List</a>: new function: make a
file of selected image files (for shell scripts, other apps).</li>
<li><a href="#prev_next">Prev/Next button and KB arrow keys</a> can
optionally jump to preceding or following gallery.<br></li>
<li><a href="#print_image">Print Image</a>: There is a bug GTK 3.16
that rotates the margins in landscape mode:<br>
<table style="text-align: left; width: 434px; height: 42px;"
border="1" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;dialog
input:<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;top<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;bottom</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;left&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;right<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;adjusted
margin:<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;right&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;left<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;top<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;bottom<br></small></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
Portrait mode works normally. Earlier releases of GTK work
normally.</li>
<li><a href="#command_line">Command line:</a> An album can be
opened initially from the command line.<br></li>
</ul>
v.16.01<br>
<ul>
<li><a href="#rename_file">Rename File</a>: file version numbers
are handled more logically.<br></li>
<li><a href="#slide_show">Slide Show</a>:</li>
<li style=
"list-style-type: none; list-style-image: none; list-style-position: outside; display: inline;">
&nbsp; + user interface improvement - button to set an image zoom
center.<br></li>
<li style=
"list-style-type: none; list-style-image: none; list-style-position: outside; display: inline;">
&nbsp; + N-key to index to the next image immediately.<br>
&nbsp; + [load] and [save] buttons in the transitions dialog.<br>
&nbsp; + [KB functions] button to show available keyboard
functions.<br></li>
<li><a href="#panorama">Panorama</a>: manual alignment option for
images without clear common features.</li>
<li><a href="#batch_convert">Batch Convert</a>: add overlay image
to output image files (e.g. for credit line).</li>
<li><a href="#paint_transp">Paint Transparency:</a> minor addition
- button to make entire image transparent.</li>
<li><a href="#search_images">Search Images:</a> explanation for
case-sensitive string matching was added.</li>
<li><a href="#color_saturation">Color Saturation</a>: new function
to adjust color saturation.</li>
<li><a href="#edit_any_metadata">Edit Any Metadata</a>: UI
improvements for ease of use.<br></li>
<li><a href="#batch_change_metadata">Batch Add/Change Metadata</a>:
UI improvements for ease of use.</li>
<li><a href="#user_options">User Options</a>: new options for
default gallery sort and to enable or disable image<br>
right-shift to minimize overlap of edit dialogs and image being
edited.<br></li>
</ul>
&nbsp;<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a style="font-family: sans-serif;" name="technical_notes" id=
"technical_notes"></a> &nbsp;&nbsp;<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<big><span style="font-weight: bold;">Technical
Notes&nbsp;</span></big><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Fotoxx
Limitations</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<table style="text-align: left; font-family: sans-serif;" height=
"171" width="835" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>image
files<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Fotoxx has been tested with
500K image files and the performace was good. See Benchmarks
below.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>image size</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>The max. supported image
width or height is 20,000 pixels (compile time constant).<br>
The maximum image size is 4 GB (about 240 megapixels).<br>
Images edited in memory have 4 float numbers (16 bytes) per pixel
(RGB + alpha).<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>image
edits</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>99 edits for undo / redo
and file version numbering (filename.v01 to
filename.v99).</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; white-space: nowrap;"><small>image
tags<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>10,000 tags, 200,000 chars.
for all tags, 1000 chars. for one image (compile time
constants).<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>thumbnail<br>
cache</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Thumbnail images are cached
in main memory to improve gallery performance. Gallery scrolling is
slower for the initial pass, and faster thereafter. Revisited
galleries are fast unless the cached thumbnails have been
replaced.<br></small></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Running out of
memory</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Fotoxx can require a huge amount of main memory to edit a large
image. A 20 megapixel image requires 640 megabytes for the simplest
edits, and more for complex edits. Images in memory are not
compressed and each RGB pixel is represented by three
floating-point numbers and a transparency value (16 bytes total).
HDR, Panorama and other composite functions hold all images in
memory during alignment and post-process tuning. If you push the
memory limits on a small PC, the Linux kernel may kill the Fotoxx
process without warning and with no message (this is to keep the
operating system itself from failing). What you see is that the
Fotoxx window simply vanishes.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Running out of disk
space</span><br style=
"font-weight: bold; font-family: sans-serif;">
During a series of image edits, each edit step is saved on disk,
and the before / after results can be viewed with the Undo/Redo
button. These images use floating point numbers for color values
and are not compressed. A 20 megapixel image makes a 320 MB file.
If there are 10 edit steps in the undo / redo stack, the required
disk space is 3.2 GB. If disk space runs out during an edit
session, the program terminates with a message. To avoid this, be
sure there is plenty of disk space wherever your /tmp/ directory
resides. When you open a new image or quit Fotoxx, the disk space
is recovered. If Fotoxx crashes, the space is recovered the next
time fotoxx is started or when the computer is rebooted.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Packages required for Fotoxx
source build</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
See the README file for instructions on compiling Fotoxx from
source.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<table style=
"text-align: left; width: 635px; height: 83px; font-family: sans-serif;"
border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;g++</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>GNU C++ compiler and C
libraries</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;libgtk3.0-dev&nbsp;</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Gnome GTK3 / GDK3 / Pixbuf
/ etc. function libraries</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;libtiff5-dev</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>tiff library development
files</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;libpng12-dev</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>png library development
files</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;liblcms2-dev</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Little CMS development
files</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;libchamplain-gtk<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Gnome geographic mapping
functions<br></small></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Note</span>: package
naming and contents vary by Linux distro (the usual chaos). The
above names are valid for Debian-based distros (including Ubuntu).
For other distros the names are different. Good luck.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Additional programs required or
optional for Fotoxx</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Fotoxx uses the following programs which are installed
separately:<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<table style="text-align: left; font-family: sans-serif;" height=
"156" width="791" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;xdg-utils</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;req.<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>open text or html files
with user's preferred application</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;exiftool</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;req.<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>(v. 8.60 or later) read and
write image metadata (tags, comments, etc.)&nbsp;<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Raw
Therapee<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;opt.<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>open a RAW file for editing
using its native GUI<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;growisofs</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;opt.</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>burn a CD or DVD with
selected images</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;xgamma</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;opt.<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>used for the Monitor Gamma
function (adjust monitor gamma)</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;fotoxx-maps<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;opt.<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>set of geographic maps to
show image locations and report images by mouse
click<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;hugin<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;opt.</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>PT Panorama function uses
Panorama Tools (normally packaged with Hugin)<br></small></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">zappcrash</span> - backtrace
dumps<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
If Fotoxx has a fatal error, it attempts to intercept the error and
produce a backtrace dump which appears in a popup window. Please
send this information to me so I can fix the error (<a style=
"font-family: sans-serif;" href=
"http://kornelix.net/contact/contact.html">contact me</a>). A
description of what you did immediately before the crash would also
be helpful.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Preview Mode</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
Some edit functions use a reduced image size for a faster
interactive response time. This is shown on the top panel as
"(reduced)". When [done] is pressed, the full-size image is then
processed. This is why [done] sometimes takes noticeable time. A
monitor-size image (2 megapixels) is 7 times faster to process than
a 14 megapixel image (typical digital camera). This method is used
whenever the preview edits can be applied to the full-size image
without visible impact (e.g. Trim/Rotate, Warp functions,
brightness and color related functions). It cannot be used for some
functions (e.g. sharpen, tone mapping) because the results for a
small image cannot be converted for a larger image.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">File Size</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
The file size shown on the top panel while an image is being edited
is the original (unedited) file size. The file size for an edited
image is not known until the image is saved on disk. In memory the
size is (pixels x 16). A 10 megapixel image uses 160 megabytes in
memory and typically &lt; 2 megabytes on disk (high quality JPEG).
When the edited image is saved, the correct file size is updated on
the top panel.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Ubuntu Unity
Launcher</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
The following launcher will have a right-click dropdown menu with
three different startup options: blank window, last image viewed,
and a gallery of recent images. Save the following text as a file
named fotoxx.desktop, make it executable, and drag the file to the
Unity left side launcher list.<br>
<small>&nbsp;<br></small> <span style=
"font-family: monospace;">&nbsp; [Desktop Entry]</span><br style=
"font-family: monospace;">
<span style="font-family: monospace;">&nbsp;
Name=fotoxx</span><br style="font-family: monospace;">
<span style="font-family: monospace;">&nbsp; GenericName=Photo
Editor</span><br style="font-family: monospace;">
<span style="font-family: monospace;">&nbsp; Comment=Edit photos
and manage collections</span><br style="font-family: monospace;">
<span style="font-family: monospace;">&nbsp;
Categories=Photography;</span><br style="font-family: monospace;">
<span style="font-family: monospace;">&nbsp;
Type=Application</span><br style="font-family: monospace;">
<span style="font-family: monospace;">&nbsp;
Terminal=false</span><br style="font-family: monospace;">
<span style="font-family: monospace;">&nbsp;
MimeType=image/bmp;image/gif;image/tiff;image/jpeg;image/png;</span><br style="font-family: monospace;">

<span style="font-family: monospace;">&nbsp;
Exec=/usr/bin/fotoxx</span><br style="font-family: monospace;">
<span style="font-family: monospace;">&nbsp;
Icon=/usr/share/fotoxx/icons/fotoxx.png</span><br style=
"font-family: monospace;">
<span style="font-family: monospace;">&nbsp;
X-Ayatana-Desktop-Shortcuts=blank window;last image;recent
images</span><br style="font-family: monospace;">
<span style="font-family: monospace;">&nbsp;</span><br style=
"font-family: monospace;">
<span style="font-family: monospace;">&nbsp; [blank window Shortcut
Group]</span><br style="font-family: monospace;">
<span style="font-family: monospace;">&nbsp; Name=blank
window</span><br style="font-family: monospace;">
<span style="font-family: monospace;">&nbsp; Exec=fotoxx
-blank</span><br style="font-family: monospace;">
<span style="font-family: monospace;">&nbsp;
TargetEnvironment=Unity</span><br style="font-family: monospace;">
<span style="font-family: monospace;">&nbsp;</span><br style=
"font-family: monospace;">
<span style="font-family: monospace;">&nbsp; [last image Shortcut
Group]</span><br style="font-family: monospace;">
<span style="font-family: monospace;">&nbsp; Name=last
image</span><br style="font-family: monospace;">
<span style="font-family: monospace;">&nbsp; Exec=fotoxx
-prev</span><br style="font-family: monospace;">
<span style="font-family: monospace;">&nbsp;
TargetEnvironment=Unity</span><br style="font-family: monospace;">
<span style="font-family: monospace;">&nbsp;</span><br style=
"font-family: monospace;">
<span style="font-family: monospace;">&nbsp; [recent images
Shortcut Group]</span><br style="font-family: monospace;">
<span style="font-family: monospace;">&nbsp; Name=recent
images</span><br style="font-family: monospace;">
<span style="font-family: monospace;">&nbsp; Exec=fotoxx
-recent</span><br style="font-family: monospace;">
<span style="font-family: monospace;">&nbsp;
TargetEnvironment=Unity</span><br style="font-family: monospace;">
<small>&nbsp;</small> <span style="font-weight: bold;"><br>
Custom Icons</span><br>
Fotoxx icons are contained in <big><span style=
"font-family: monospace;">/usr/share/fotoxx/icons</span></big>. You
can change these if wanted.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">File Types
Supported</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Fotoxx uses libraries to support reading and writing of image
files: the GDK pixbuf library, libpng and libtiff. The file types
that can be read and written include JPG / JPEG, PNG, and TIF /
TIFF. Three RGB colors with 8 bits per color are supported for all
types. PNG and TIFF also support 16 bits per color. Fewer than 8
bits per color and grayscale images are partly supported, and are
converted to RGB internally.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Index Files</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
These can be found in the directory <big><span style=
"font-family: monospace;">/home/&lt;user&gt;/.fotoxx/image_index/</span></big><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">

The file "indexB" contains image file pathnames and metadata items
that are indexed for fast searching (dates, ratings, tags, caption,
comments, geotags). The file "top_directories" contains a list of
the top image directories. These are searched for new image files
whenever Fotoxx starts up. The last entry is the thumbnails
directory.<br>
<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Color Depth</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
8-bit color (256 brightness levels), as supported by JPEG files, is
the norm for image files and is generally adequate. A difference of
one brightness step (0.4% of the entire range) cannot be seen. A
greater color depth than 8 bits can be useful if some part of the
brightness range within an image has been greatly expanded using
retouch or repair functions. This expansion can lead to visible
"banding" or "posterization". If the RAW image is edited instead of
the JPEG (and if the RAW image really has more than 8 bits of
noise-free color), this problem can be reduced, even if the edited
image is converted back to JPEG for final storage. Only the most
expensive cameras produce RAW image files with more than 8 bits of
noise-free color at normal light levels (status 2015).<br>
<br>
The image below changes gradually from black to white. The color
depth is 6 bits and the number of brightness levels is 64. Note
that the brightness steps are barely visible.<br>
<img style="width: 580px; height: 31px;" alt="" src=
"images/brightness%20steps.png" vspace="0" align=
"left">&nbsp;<br clear="all">
&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Noise Measurement</span><br style=
"font-weight: bold;">
The noise measurement tool (part of the menu Repair &gt; Denoise)
measures image noise. When used on a RAW image, it measures camera
sensor noise. To work properly, the image spot being measured must
be in an absolutely uniform image area, otherwise variations in
subject brightness will be measured instead of image noise. The
measured spot should ideally be a mid-gray tone. A bright area may
have little or no noise because the camera pixels are saturated.
The measured noise value applies only for the ISO exposure level
used. Higher ISO levels have more noise. You may be surprised at
the typically high noise levels in RAW images. Cameras filter out
this noise when making the JPEG image. Very expensive cameras with
full-size sensors may still have noise levels exceeding 0.5 on the
scale 0-255 (i.e. noise in the 9th bit) even for normal ISO values
around 100.<br>
<span style="text-decoration: underline;"><br>
Method</span><br>
An area of radius 10 pixels around the clicked position is sampled.
The RGB brightness levels reported (0-255) are the averages for
this area. Within this area, every pixel is measured and compared
with the mean of the surrounding 5x5 block of pixels. The RGB noise
levels reported are the average differences. If the sampled area
has a small gradient in brightness, the measurement is not
sensitive to this. This is because the central pixel in a 5x5 block
will naturally have the average RGB values of the surrounding
pixels (if noise is zero). The image being measured is actually a
16-bit TIF image made from the RAW, preserving up to 16 bits of
color data if this much is available from the RAW image.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Alignment Algorithm</span> (HDR,
HDF, Stack, Panorama)<br>
Relatively few high-contrast or "edge" pixels are selected to
control alignment in HDR, HDF, Stack and Panorama. The actual
pixels used are shown in red during the alignment process, which is
also more entertaining. Each image in succession is systematically
warped various small amounts and the fit with other images is
tested. This is done because two photos made with slightly
different horizons or rotations will not fit perfectly with simple
translation and rotation. Also the cylindrical image projection
used for panoramas is only an approximation of what the camera lens
actually does.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Alpha Channels</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
Images having alpha channels (transparency information) can be
edited, and the alpha channel is preserved if the image is saved as
a PNG file. JPEG files do not support alpha channels.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Image Deterioration From Repeated
Editing</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
If you save an edited image file and then use this file later to
perform additional edits, pixel resolution may be lost. It is
better if you do all edits when the image files are first
processed, to minimize image deterioration (or go back to the
originals if you still have them). Any function that changes image
size or shape will reduce resolution about 1/2 pixel. These are the
resize, rotate, warp / warp, and all the composite functions.
Rotating 90 degrees does not affect resolution. When downsizing an
image, using the ratios 1/2, 1/3, 1/4 will give the least loss of
resolution. Functions that change brightness and color do not
affect resolution.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">JPEG Compression</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
If a JPEG file from a digital camera is saved with Fotoxx, you will
likely notice a large reduction in file size, even if a high JPEG
quality level is used. This is because Fotoxx can afford to invest
more processing power in the compression. A camera CPU is not very
fast and must save the photos quickly to be ready for the next
photo, so the processing time available for compression is limited.
The CPU of a PC is typically much faster and has more time, so the
compression level is higher. The smaller file size does not mean
that the quality is less.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Image Deterioration From Repeated
Saving of JPEG files</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
Reading a compressed JPEG image and saving it again can lead to
loss of detail and increased image artifacts. The effect seems to
be negligible if JPEG "quality" is set to a high value when the
image is saved. The image below was saved 10 times using quality=90
(Fotoxx default), each time opening and saving the previous image.
Differences can be found if you look hard enough. The images are 2x
size and the insets are 5x.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<img style="width: 553px; height: 248px; font-family: sans-serif;"
alt="" src="images/jpeg%20quality.jpg" vspace="5"><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">EXIF Errors</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
Cameras (esp. older ones) do not always produce structurally
correct EXIF data, and the program exiftool (used by Fotoxx to
manipulate EXIF data) may produce error messages. I have been able
to fix these cases by saving the image file on top of itself, which
will replace the EXIF data with whatever exiftool was able to read
correctly. If desired data gets lost, you can restore it using the
<a href="#edit_any_metadata">Edit Any Metadata</a>
function.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Newline characters in user
Comments and Captions</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
When editing metadata Comments or Captions, if you need to align
text in columns, you can use the [enter] key to force new lines.
These are converted into the string "\n" before being stored in
image EXIF / IPTC data, since newline characters are not allowed
(exiftool converts them into periods). If the text is viewed or
edited again, the "\n" strings are converted back to new lines, so
that the original text alignments are restored. <span style=
"text-decoration: underline;">This is not standard</span>, so don't
expect the text to remain aligned if viewed in Photoshop, etc. If
this is a requirement, then do not use the enter key to make new
lines when entering long text - just let the text overflow to the
next line by itself. In this case, column alignment is not
possible.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Installed Files</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
Foloxx installs files in the following locations.<br>
Repackaging by distros could put them somewhere else, e.g. /opt...
instead of /usr...<br>
<table style=
"text-align: left; width: 664px; height: 71px; font-family: sans-serif;"
border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">
&nbsp;/usr/bin/fotoxx</td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>the executable program
file</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">
&nbsp;/usr/share/fotoxx/*</td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>user guide, translation.po
files, icons, default data, etc.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">
&nbsp;/usr/share/doc/fotoxx/*</td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>change log, man page,
README and other documentation
files.&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<br></small></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<br>
Installed Files - optional fotoxx-maps package<br>
<table style="text-align: left; width: 577px; height: 48px;"
border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">
&nbsp;/usr/share/fotoxx-maps/*<br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>geographic maps data files
(112 MB)&nbsp;<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">
&nbsp;/usr/share/doc/fotoxx-maps/*<br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>change log, man page,
README&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<br></small></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Local Files</span><br>
Files in Fotoxx home (default <big><span style=
"font-family: monospace;">/home/&lt;user&gt;/.fotoxx/</span></big>)<br>

These are preserved when a new release of Fotoxx is installed.<br>
<table style="text-align: left; font-family: sans-serif;" height=
"794" width="723" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;/albums</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>image albums from Manage
Albums function<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;/custom_kernel</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>saved custom kernel data
files</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;/edit_scripts<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>saved edit script files
(for batch editing)<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;/favorites</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>saved data for
user-configuration of favorites menu</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;/image_index</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>top directories, thumbnail
directory, image index file<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;/mashup</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>saved mashup project
files</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;/patterns<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>saved background
patterns<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;/printer_color<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>saved printer color
calibration files<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;/retouch_combo</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>saved settings for the
Retouch Combo function</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;/saved_areas</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>"cutout" files saved from
the Select Area &gt; Save dialog</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;/saved_curves</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>curve data saved from
Retouch curve edit dialogs</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;/slideshows</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>user preferences from Slide
Show function<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;/slideshow_trans<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>saved slide show transition
parameters<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;/thumbnails</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>thumbnail files (default
location, user can change this)</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;/user_maps<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>custom map files made by
the user<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;/write_text</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>image text overlays saved
from Add Text function<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;bookmarks</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>bookmark names and image
file locations</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;burnlist<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>list of image files to
write on DVD/BlueRay disc<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;KB-shortcuts</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>user-defined or modified
keyboard shortcuts</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;logfile</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Fotoxx outputs that may be
relevant for diagnosing problems</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;metadata_report<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>Batch Report Metadata
output report - tabular text file<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;metadata_report_items<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>list of metadata items
reported by Batch Report Metadata<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;metadata_short_list<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>metadata key names for
Batch Add / Change Metadata<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;metadata_view_extra<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>extra items for the
metadata short report, added by the user<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;mosaic_tiles<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>binary file, compressed
tiles from the Mosaic function<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;pagesetup</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>saves page setup data for
print function</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;parameters</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>setup parameters that are
saved across Fotoxx sessions</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;plugins</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>saves the plugins menu
contents</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;printsettings</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>saves print settings data
for print function</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;recent_files</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>a list of the last 100
files opened by Fotoxx, saved when Fotoxx exits</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;search_results</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>list of the last image
files found with Search Images</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;stuck-pixels<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>data saved from the Fix
Stuck Pixels function<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;tags_defined</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>a list of all categories
and tags currently used in all images</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;zappcrash<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>if Fotoxx crashes, a
traceback dump is deposited here<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;zdialog_inputs</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>saved dialog data for
dialogs that recall prior inputs</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small>&nbsp;zdialog_positions</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>saved dialog window
positions (relative to main window)</small></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Metadata used by
Fotoxx</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
The following metadata items (stored inside the image files) are
used by Fotoxx. These items and any other metadata can be viewed or
edited using Fotoxx or other programs. Images can be searched using
these items or any other metadata as selection criteria. Those
marked "index" can be searched very fast, others more slowly. Items
not listed here are searchable but not indexed.<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<table style="text-align: left; font-family: sans-serif;" height=
"269" width="810" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">&nbsp;Metadata section and
name</td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">&nbsp;Usage</td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">&nbsp;Indexed</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;IPTC&nbsp;
Keywords</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;tags entered by
user</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp; yes</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;IPTC&nbsp;
Rating</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;"star" rating entered
by user</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp; yes</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;EXIF&nbsp;
ImageSize</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;pixel width and
height, 1234x2345<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp; yes</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;EXIF&nbsp;
DateTimeOriginal</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;date / time photo was
made, or entered by user</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp; yes</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;EXIF&nbsp;
ImageHistory</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;history of edits made
by Fotoxx<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp; no</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;EXIF&nbsp;
UserComment</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;comment text entered
by user</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp; yes</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;IPTC&nbsp;
Caption-Abstract</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;caption or abstract
text entered by user</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp; yes</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;EXIF&nbsp;
FocalLengthIn35mmFormat</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;camera focal length
used, 35mm equivalent</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp; no</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;EXIF&nbsp; City,
Country</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;city/location and
country from camera GPS, or entered by user</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp; yes</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;EXIF&nbsp;
GPSLatitude, GPSLongitude</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;earth coordinates
from camera GPS, or entered by user</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp; yes</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;EXIF&nbsp;
RollAngle<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;camera slant angle,
can be used to auto-level an image<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp; no</small><br></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Dialog Window
Positioning</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
For commonly used dialogs, Fotoxx saves the dialog window position
(relative to the main window) and tries to restore the same
position the next time the dialog is started. This works, mostly.
Sometimes the window manager ignores this request and places the
dialog somewhere else.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Fotoxx Benchmarks</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
Fotoxx 16.09, Intel Core i5 2.7 GHz (4 processor cores)<br>
<small><small><small><small>&nbsp;&nbsp;</small></small></small></small><br>

<table style=
"text-align: left; width: 697px; height: 550px; font-family: sans-serif;"
border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">Image Index Speed <small>(find new
image files, update image index and thumbnails)</small><br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">&nbsp;Speed<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;<small>I</small>mage
index speed using a 5400 rpm disk<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;1180 /
min.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Image index speed
using a 7200 rpm disk<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;1700 /
min.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Image index speed
using a 10000 rpm disk<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;1920 /
min.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Image index speed
using an SSD disk<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;2640 /
min.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small><small><small><br></small></small></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small><small><small><br></small></small></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">Following benchmarks used 9215
image files and 7200 rpm disk<br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Startup after reboot,
no new image files<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;&lt; 1
sec.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Startup with 100 new
image files to index<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;6
sec.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Find all images with
tag "Rosi" (253 images)<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;&lt; 1
sec.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Find all images with
"Rosi" in file name (111 images)<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;&lt; 1
sec.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Find all images dated
Jan 1 - May 30, 2013 (255 images)<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;&lt; 1
sec.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Find all images dated
in 2013 and with location = "Freising" (90 images)<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;&lt; 1
sec.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Find all images dated
in 2013 with EXIF "make" = "panasonic" (342
images)<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;3.8
sec.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Click on world map,
France / Esterel (5 images)<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;&lt; 1
sec.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;List all locations
having images with geotags (6714 images)<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;&lt; 1
sec.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Click on location
Germany / Dresden (113 images)<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;&lt; 1
sec.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small><small><small>&nbsp;<br></small></small></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small><small><br></small></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">Following benchmarks used 257K
image files on an SSD disk</td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Initial index of
256906 image files (made by duplicating my collection
25x)</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;1.6
hours</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Startup with 5921 new
image files<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;2.3 min.</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Search 256906 image
files for date &gt; 2016.01.01 (13744 images found)</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;&lt; 1
sec.</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Click on world map,
Monument Valley (760 images found)</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;&lt; 1
sec.</small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small><small><br></small></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">
<small><small><br></small></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;">Following benchmarks used 257K
image files on a 5400 rpm disk<br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;initial index of
256802 image files</small> <small>(made by duplicating my
collection 25x)</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;3.6
hours<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Search 256802 image
files for date &gt; 2016.01.01 (14014 images
found)<br></small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;&lt; 1
sec.<br></small></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;Click on world map,
Monument Valley (780 images found)</small></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top;"><small>&nbsp;&lt; 1
sec.</small><br></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
&nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Startup time benchmarks by Image
Index Level</span> (Tools &gt; User Options)<br>
(same conditions as above, 257K old image files, zero new image
files)<br>
<table style="text-align: left; width: 439px; height: 156px;"
border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: middle; font-family: monospace;">Disk
Type<br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">Index<br>
Level(*)</td>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">initial
startup<br>
after reboot<br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">
subsequent<br>
startup<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">5400
rpm<br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">
&nbsp;2<br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">&nbsp;25
sec.<br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">&nbsp;4.8
sec.<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">5400
rpm<br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">
&nbsp;1<br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">
&nbsp;2.5<br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">
&nbsp;2.0<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">5400
rpm<br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">
&nbsp;0<br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">
&nbsp;1.3<br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">
&nbsp;1.3<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">
SSD<br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">
&nbsp;2<br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">
&nbsp;6.9<br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">
&nbsp;4.7<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">
SSD<br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">
&nbsp;1<br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">
&nbsp;2.0<br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">
&nbsp;1.8<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">
SSD<br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">
&nbsp;0<br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">
&nbsp;1.1<br></td>
<td style="vertical-align: top; font-family: monospace;">
&nbsp;1.1<br></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<small><small><small>&nbsp;&nbsp;<br></small></small> (*) Index
level:<br>
0 = no indexing<br>
1 = use current index without updates for new image files<br>
2 = normal full indexing, including find and index new image
files<br></small> &nbsp;<br>
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Source Code</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
The C++ source code is heavily commented in the hope that others
can understand and use the code for their own projects. If you have
a technical question about how something works, or a better idea to
pass along, you may <a style="font-family: sans-serif;" href=
"http://kornelix.net/contact/contact.html">contact
me</a>.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Questions, Problems,
Bugs</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
If you have a question or a problem, you may <a style=
"font-family: sans-serif;" href=
"http://kornelix.net/contact/contact.html">contact me</a>. If you
send me any images that work poorly, I can use these to try to
improve Fotoxx. If there is a traceback dump (zappcrash window),
please send this to me. Please explain how to produce the error, if
you can.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Technical Reference
Book</span><br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
I used the book "Introduction to Image Processing and Analysis" by
Russ and Russ, CRC Press. It is clear and concise. The following
functions were adapted from this book: flatten brightness
distribution, noise reduction (median smoothing, top hat), sharpen
(unsharp mask, kuwahara method), embossing, RGB/HSL
conversion.<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br style="font-family: sans-serif;">
<span style="font-weight: bold;">Acknowledgements</span><br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
The libraries and programs libtiff, libpng, liblcms, libraw and
exiftool have helped Fotoxx evolve much faster than otherwise
possible. Of course this also applies to GTK, the GNU tools and
libraries, and the entire GNU / Linux ecosystem. Thanks to those
who have donated their work for translations, their ideas for
development and their time for testing. Special thanks to the
following: Dick, Jill, Jamps, Andre, Doriano, Curley, Jan, Rosi.
Translation credits are in Help &gt; About.<br style=
"font-family: sans-serif;">
&nbsp;<br>
&nbsp;<br>
<a name="function_index"></a><br>
<big><b>Index of Menu Functions</b></big><br>
<table width="100%" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><a href="#add_lines">Add Lines / Arrows to Image</a></td>
<td valign="top">add lines or arrows, position with mouse, set
thickness, color, other styles<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#add_text">Add Text to Image</a></td>
<td valign="top">add text, position with mouse, set font, color,
transparency, other styles<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#add_transparency">Add Transparency</a></td>
<td valign="top">convert a color or brightness level into
transparency level<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#adjust_HSL">Adjust HSL</a></td>
<td valign="top">replace a color tone with another, based on HSL
color model<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#adjust_RGB_CMY">Adjust RGB / CMY</a></td>
<td valign="top">adjust color levels based on RGB color
model<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#anti_alias">Anti-Alias</a></td>
<td valign="top">remove pixelated edges from low-resolution
images<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#area_copy_paste">Area Copy and Paste</a></td>
<td valign="top">select image area, copy and paste across images,
load and save to file<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#area_enable_disable">Area Enable / Disable</a></td>
<td valign="top">toggle between area editing and whole image
editing<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#area_invert">Area Invert</a></td>
<td valign="top">exchange inside area &lt;--&gt; outside
area<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#area_open_save">Area Open and Save</a></td>
<td valign="top">save area to a file, open and re-use (paste into
an image)<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#area_show_hide">Area Show / Hide</a></td>
<td valign="top">show or hide area outline during image
editing<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#area_unselect">Area Unselect</a></td>
<td valign="top">permanently remove a selected area<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#batch_change_metadata">Batch Add / Change
Metadata</a></td>
<td valign="top">add or revise metadata items for selected
images<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#batch_add_geotags">Batch Add Geotags</a></td>
<td valign="top">add or revise location name and coordinates for
selected images<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#batch_tags">Batch Add / Remove Tags</a></td>
<td valign="top">add or remove multiple tags (keywords) for
selected images<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#batch_convert">Batch Convert Files</a></td>
<td valign="top">convert size, file type, name, location ... for
selected images<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#batch_delete_trash">Batch Delete / Trash</a></td>
<td valign="top">delete or trash selected images<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#batch_raw">Batch RAW</a></td>
<td valign="top">process selected RAW images, save as editable
files in 8 or 16 bit color<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#batch_raw_therapee">Batch Raw Therapee</a></td>
<td valign="top">same as above, using the Raw Therapee image
converter<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#batch_rename_tags">Batch Rename Tags</a></td>
<td valign="top">rename multiple tags (keywords) for selected
images<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#batch_report_metadata">Batch Report Metadata</a></td>
<td valign="top">output metadata text file for selected metadata
items and images<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#batch_upright">Batch Upright</a></td>
<td valign="top">find rotated images and upright them<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#blur_background">Blur Background</a> (Bokeh)</td>
<td valign="top">select image areas to remain sharp and blur the
rest<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#blur_image">Blur Image</a></td>
<td valign="top">blur an entire image or selected area<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#bookmarks">Bookmarks</a></td>
<td valign="top">add bookmarks to image collection, go to
bookmarked location<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#brightness_graph">Brightness Distribution
Graph</a></td>
<td valign="top">show a brightness histogram, for all colors or
each RGB color<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#burn_DVD">Burn Images to DVD / BlueRay</a></td>
<td valign="top">burn selected image files to DVD or Blue Ray
disc<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#cartoon">Cartoon</a></td>
<td valign="top">convert an image into a cartoon<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#change_language">Change Language</a></td>
<td valign="top">change the user interface language<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#choose_map">Choose Map</a></td>
<td valign="top">choose a local map file I(world, continent,
country, city)<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#color_depth">Color Depth</a></td>
<td valign="top">set color depth from 1 to 16 bits per RGB
color<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#color_drawing">Color Drawing</a></td>
<td valign="top">convert an image into a simulated color
drawing<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#color_mode">Color Mode</a></td>
<td valign="top">change between black/white and color, positive or
negative<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#color_profile">Color Profile</a></td>
<td valign="top">change color profile (e.g. sRGB &lt;--&gt; Adobe
RGB)<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#color_saturation">Color Saturation</a></td>
<td valign="top">adjust the color saturation of an image<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#copy_move">Copy / Move Image File</a></td>
<td valign="top">copy or move an image file to another
location<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#copyto_desktop">Copy to Desktop</a></td>
<td valign="top">copy an image file to the desktop<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#cycle_desktop">Cycle Desktop Wallpaper</a></td>
<td valign="top">change the monitor background image periodically
or at bootup<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#darkbrite_pixels">Dark / Bright Pixels</a></td>
<td valign="top">highlight pixels outside a selected brightness
range<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#delete_metadata">Delete Metadata</a></td>
<td valign="top">delete selected metadata items or all
metadata<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#delete_trash">Delete / Trash Image File</a></td>
<td valign="top">delete an image file or move it to the trash
bin<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#denoise">Denoise Image</a></td>
<td valign="top">reduce noise in a photo made under low light
conditions<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#directed_blur">Directed Blur</a></td>
<td valign="top">blur the image in one direction (perpendicular
direction remains sharp)<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#dot_matrix">Dots</a></td>
<td valign="top">convert an image into a dot matrix (Roy
Lichtenstein effect)<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#edit_any_metadata">Edit Any Metadata</a></td>
<td valign="top">edit any metadata item<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#edit_brightness">Edit Brightness
Distribution</a></td>
<td valign="top">edit the brightness distribution directly (shift
pixel brightness levels)<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#edit_metadata">Edit Metadata</a></td>
<td valign="top">edit main metadata items (date/time, tags, rating,
location, caption)<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#embossing">Embossing</a></td>
<td valign="top">add a 3D relief effect to an image<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#export_filelist">Export File List</a></td>
<td valign="top">export a text file list of selected images (for
external program feed)<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#favorites_menu">Favorites</a></td>
<td valign="top">graphic popup menu with user-selected functions,
icons, and layout<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#find_area_gap">Find Area Gap</a></td>
<td valign="top">show where there is a gap in a Select Area
hand-drawn outline<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#find_duplicates">Find Duplicate Images</a></td>
<td valign="top">find duplicate images within the entire image
collection<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#fix_perspective">Fix Perspective</a></td>
<td valign="top">correct the perspective of a photo made at an
angle<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#flatten_book">Flatten Book Page</a></td>
<td valign="top">flatten a photo of a curvy page from a thick
book<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#flip_image">Flip Image</a></td>
<td valign="top">invert an image left-right or top-bottom<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#graduated_blur">Graduated Blur</a></td>
<td valign="top">preserve high-contrast pixels and blur the rest,
scaled by contrast<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#grid_lines">Grid Lines</a></td>
<td valign="top">set grid lines on or off, or change horizontal and
vertical counts<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#HDF">High Depth of Field (HDF)</a></td>
<td valign="top">combine near- and far-focus photos for extended
focus depth<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#HDR">High Dynamic Range (HDR)</a></td>
<td valign="top">combine low- and high-brightness photos for
extended brightness range<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#image_locations">Image Locations Report</a></td>
<td valign="top">list image locations and date groups, click on
list for gallery of images<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#images_by_map">Images by Map Location</a></td>
<td valign="top">click on a map marker for a gallery of images at
that location<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#image_timeline">Image Timeline Report</a></td>
<td valign="top">list image counts by year and month, click on list
for gallery of images<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#index_files">Index Image Files</a></td>
<td valign="top">installation utility - find all image files and
make an index for fast searching<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#KB_shortcuts">Keyboard Shortcuts</a></td>
<td valign="top">show keyboard shortcuts and define custom
shortcuts<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#leverage_edits">Leverage Edits</a></td>
<td valign="top">regulate the intensity of an edit function using
brightness, contrast, or color<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#line_color">Line Color</a></td>
<td valign="top">change the color used for image lines (area
outlines, mouse "paintbrush")<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#make_waves">Make Waves</a></td>
<td valign="top">image wave warp, vary intensity, wavelength,
randomness<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#manage_albums">Manage Albums</a></td>
<td valign="top">create and arrange arbitrary ordered views of
images without duplications<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#manage_tags">Manage Tags</a></td>
<td valign="top">create tags (keywords) and categories, for managed
image tagging<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#mashup">Mashup</a></td>
<td valign="top">photomontage - combine images and text in an
arbitrary layout<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#match_colors">Match Colors</a></td>
<td valign="top">match colors in one image to the colors in another
image<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#missing_translations">Missing Translations</a></td>
<td valign="top">list the missing translations for a given
language<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#monitor_color">Monitor Color</a></td>
<td valign="top">show a color pattern on the monitor for adjusting
brightness and contrast<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#monitor_gamma">Monitor Gamma</a></td>
<td valign="top">show a special image on the monitor for adjusting
gamma<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#mosaic">Mosaic</a></td>
<td valign="top">convert an image into a mosaic of image tiles
which can be clicked to view<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#new_blank_image">New Blank Image</a></td>
<td valign="top">create a blank image with a desired color
(background for later use)<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#newest_images">Newest Images</a></td>
<td valign="top">show the newest images based on photo date or file
date<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#new_window">New Window</a></td>
<td valign="top">create a parallel Fotoxx window<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#open_image_file">Open Image File</a></td>
<td valign="top">standard file open dialog to select an image file
to view or edit<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#open_previous_file">Open Previous File</a></td>
<td valign="top">show the previous file - instant toggle between
any two files<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#open_raw_file">Open RAW File</a></td>
<td valign="top">open a RAW file to view or edit (tiff file with 16
bits per RGB color)<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#organizing_images">Organizing for Searching</a></td>
<td valign="top">how image organization, naming, and metadata
affects search capability<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#OSM_map_view">OSM Map</a></td>
<td valign="top">world map at any scale, retrieved as needed from
the internet<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#OSM_map_source">OSM Map Source</a></td>
<td valign="top">select optional source for internet map<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#paint_clone">Paint / Clone</a></td>
<td valign="top">paint on an image with the mouse, using a color or
other image area<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#paint_edits">Paint Edits</a></td>
<td valign="top">"paint" an edit function locally and gradually
with the mouse<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#paint_transp">Paint Transparency</a></td>
<td valign="top">"paint" image transparency locally and gradually
with the mouse<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#panorama">Panorama Image</a></td>
<td valign="top">combine 2-4 images into a wide panorama with
automatic edge fitting<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#pattern">Pattern</a></td>
<td valign="top">tile the image with a repeating pattern, vary
contrast and transparency<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#pencil_sketch">Pencil Sketch</a></td>
<td valign="top">convert an image into a simulated pencil
sketch<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#plugins">Plugins</a></td>
<td valign="top">add a menu for an external plugin function, or
call the function<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#prev_next">Previous / Next Image</a></td>
<td valign="top">go to the previous or next image in the current
gallery<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#print_calibrated">Print Calibrated Image</a></td>
<td valign="top">print an image using a predefined printer color
profile<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#calibrate_printer">Printer Color Calibration</a></td>
<td valign="top">compute a calibrated color profile for a
printer<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#print_image">Print Image File</a></td>
<td valign="top">print an image with custom margins and
scaling<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#PT_panorama">PT Panorama</a></td>
<td valign="top">combine images into a panorama using the Panorama
Tools program<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#ramp_brightness">Ramp Brightness</a></td>
<td valign="top">ramp brightness across an image (compensate uneven
lighting)<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#ramp_color">Ramp Color</a></td>
<td valign="top">vary RGB levels centered on chosen image
locations<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#recent_images">Recent Images</a></td>
<td valign="top">show the most recent images viewed or
edited<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#redeye_remove">Red Eyes</a></td>
<td valign="top">remove red eyes from photos made with flash
lighting<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#remove_dust">Remove Dust</a></td>
<td valign="top">remove dust spots from scanned slides or archaic
images<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#rename_file">Rename Image File</a></td>
<td valign="top">file rename function, easy to use for a series of
images<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#replace_album_file">Replace Album File</a></td>
<td valign="top">substitute one file for another in selected or all
albums<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#resize_image">Resize Image</a></td>
<td valign="top">change the image scale with presets for 3/4, 2/3,
1/2, 1/3, 1/4<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#resources">Resources</a></td>
<td valign="top">report memory usage to log file (leak
detector)<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#retouch_combo">Retouch Combo</a></td>
<td valign="top">edit brightness, contrast, color, color
temperature, white balance ...<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#file_save">Save to Disk</a></td>
<td valign="top">save modified image to same file, to new version
or to new file<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#script_files">Script Files</a></td>
<td valign="top">record a series of edits with one file, then
execute on many files<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#search_images">Search Images Report</a></td>
<td valign="top">find images based on date, rating, tags, caption
text, location/file name ...<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#select_area">Select Area</a></td>
<td valign="top">select image area(s) to be edited separately from
background<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#select_hairy">Select Hairy</a></td>
<td valign="top">special tool to select a ragged or hairy area with
speed and precision<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#selective_rescale">Selective Rescale</a></td>
<td valign="top">shrink an image while leaving a selected area
unchanged<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#set_desktop">Set Desktop Wallpaper</a></td>
<td valign="top">set the desktop background image from the current
image<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#sharpen_image">Sharpen Image</a></td>
<td valign="top">sharpen fuzzy edges within an image<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#shift_colors">Shift Colors</a></td>
<td valign="top">shift image RGB colors with a sliding scale: GBR
&lt;-- RGB --&gt; BRG<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#show_captions">Show Captions</a></td>
<td valign="top">toggle display of captions and comments in upper
left image corner<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#show_RGB">Show RGB</a></td>
<td valign="top">show RGB values at selected image locations, also
during edits<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#slide_show">Slide Show</a></td>
<td valign="top">show album images in sequence with animated
transitions and pan/zoom<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#smart_erase">Smart Erase</a></td>
<td valign="top">replace power lines, signs, ground litter, etc.
with neighborhood pixels<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#sphere">Spherical Projection</a></td>
<td valign="top">project an image into a sphere, variable size and
flatness<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#stack_noise">Stack / Noise</a></td>
<td valign="top">combine multiple high ISO noisy photos to make one
with reduced noise<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#stack_paint">Stack / Paint</a></td>
<td valign="top">combine photos taken at different moments to
eliminate transient objects</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#stuck_pixels">Stuck Pixels</a></td>
<td valign="top">find and map stuck pixels, use map to heal photos
from the same camera<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#sync_gallery">Sync Gallery</a></td>
<td valign="top">set the gallery to the directory of the current
image file<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#texture">Texture</a></td>
<td valign="top">add texture to an image by amplification of
existing brightness variation<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#tiles">Tiles</a></td>
<td valign="top">convert an image into tiles with variable 3D
effect<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#tone_mapping">Tone Mapping</a></td>
<td valign="top">amplify low contrast details without changing
overall contrast<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#trim_rotate">Trim (crop) and Rotate<br></a></td>
<td valign="top">combination function to level a tilted image and
trim margins<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#unbend_image">Unbend Images</a></td>
<td valign="top">fix perspective for a curved wide-angle image,
especially panoramas<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#undo_redo">Undo / Redo Button</a></td>
<td valign="top">step forward or backward through image edit
stages, or go to any stage<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#unwarp_closeup">Unwarp Closeup</a></td>
<td valign="top">remove distortion from close-up face photos
(balloon face, big nose)<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#update_albums">Update Albums</a></td>
<td valign="top">auto update albums to latest file
versions<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#flickr_upload">Upload to Flickr</a></td>
<td valign="top">upload selected image files to the Flickr internet
photo service<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#upright">Upright Image</a></td>
<td valign="top">rotate image -90 or +90 degrees (automatic if EXIF
orientation available)<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#user_options">User Options</a></td>
<td valign="top">dialog for user settable options<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#vertical_panorama">Vertical Panorama</a></td>
<td valign="top">combine 2-4 images into a vertical panorama with
automatic edge fitting<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#vignette">Vignette</a></td>
<td valign="top">fix camera vignette (dark corners) or design a
vignette with any shape<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#view_metadata">View Metadata</a></td>
<td valign="top">brief report of most significant metadata, or full
report of everything<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#voodoo">Voodo 1 and Voodo 2</a></td>
<td valign="top">automatic image enhancement (1-click) that often
works well enough<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#warp_affine">Warp Affine</a></td>
<td valign="top">warp image with affine transformation (parallel
lines remain parallel)<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#warp_area">Warp Area</a></td>
<td valign="top">warp within a Select Area by dragging the image
with the mouse<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#warp_curved">Warp Curved</a></td>
<td valign="top">warp image by mouse dragging, with range from
1-100% of image size<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#warp_linear">Warp Linear</a></td>
<td valign="top">warp image by dragging one corner - straight lines
remain straight<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#world_map_view">World Map</a></td>
<td valign="top">select from locally stored map files: world,
continents, countries<br></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a href="#zonal_flatten">Zonal Flatten</a></td>
<td valign="top">bring details out of shadows and other
low-contrast areas<br></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<a href="#zonal_flatten"></a><br>
<br>
</body>
</html>
fotoxx-common 16.11.1-1 / usr / share / fotoxx / data / userguide-en.html
